JP7629211B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, the control board for controlling the gaming operation in a gaming machine is installed inside a transparent board case while being housed therein, from the standpoint of preventing fraud, etc., and is required to display unique identification information (board management information) including, for example, the name of the manufacturer of the gaming machine and its model name so that it can be easily identified in that state.

In such gaming machines, a system has been proposed in which the main body of the control board is provided with multiple identification information display sections with different identification information printed on them, and the identification information display sections other than the necessary ones can be selectively separated, making it possible to display only the identification information appropriate to the mode of use (see, for example, Patent Document 1). According to the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the same control board can be used between different models, which increases its versatility and reduces manufacturing costs.

JP 2006-68112 A

Recently, there has been a demand for further reduction in manufacturing costs for such gaming machines .

The present invention aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration:

A gaming machine equipped with a main control board (e.g., main control board 411) on which a main control unit (e.g., main control unit 411a) that controls the progress of a game and a gaming value control unit (e.g., medal count control unit 411b) that controls management of a gaming value are mounted,
The main control board is mounted inside the gaming machine in a state where it is housed in a transparent board case, and a unique information display unit (e.g., unique information display unit 541) for displaying unique information (e.g., board management information) is provided at a position where it can be seen in that state.
The main control board has a board body (e.g., board body 544) on whose surface a conductive wiring pattern is arranged, and an insulating layer (e.g., resist layer 545) covering the surface of the board body,
The insulating layer is configured to be transparent or semi-transparent;
the unique information is disposed between the substrate body and the insulating layer in the unique information display portion,
the main control board has a surface on which the unique information display unit is provided as a component mounting surface, and a plurality of electronic components can be mounted on the component mounting surface;
In the component mounting surface other than the unique information display portion, component information for identifying the mounted electronic component is printed on a surface of the insulating layer,
A plurality of surface mount components and a plurality of dip mount components are mounted on the main control board,
terminals of the plurality of surface mount components are soldered to the component mounting surface;
terminals of the plurality of DIP-mounted components are inserted into through holes penetrating the main control board from the component mounting surface side and soldered to a back side of the component mounting surface;
The plurality of surface mount components include at least a first integrated circuit (e.g., IC3) connected to the microprocessor of the main control unit, and a second integrated circuit (e.g., IC5) connected to the microprocessor of the game value control unit;
the first integrated circuit and the second integrated circuit each have a plurality of terminals, and the plurality of terminals of the first integrated circuit and the plurality of terminals of the second integrated circuit are connected by a plurality of wirings,
A plurality of test points are provided connected to each of the plurality of wirings.

According to this gaming machine, at least some of the electronic components in the main control board are surface mounted components.
While adopting the above, the surface mount components (the first group connected to the microprocessor of the main control unit)
A connection path between the integrated circuit and the second integrated circuit connected to the microprocessor of the gaming value control unit
Since multiple test points are provided on the
Since the system can carry out proper inspections even in places that are difficult to access, it does not undermine the fairness or reliability of the game.
This allows the manufacturing costs to be reduced without compromising the manufacturing process.
In addition, according to this gaming machine, the unique information can be appropriately protected, so that the manufacturing cost
This allows for a more reliable board configuration while reducing costs.
In addition, the substrate structure itself can be easily visually confirmed, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.
It is possible to reduce the number of errors while improving the ease of checking.

A gaming machine with the above configuration can reduce manufacturing costs.

A diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. A diagram for explaining the playability of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the modes of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing a pattern arrangement table of the first gaming machine related to this embodiment. A figure showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine related to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, the stop operation modes, and the display combinations, etc., of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. A figure for explaining the limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a pattern code storage area of a first gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a press sequence storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance/start check process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the start of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the end of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine equipped with a main control board according to another example. A figure showing examples of the configuration of a game information display unit, a medal count display unit, and a medal lending display unit provided in a gaming machine equipped with a main control board relating to another example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of a main control board and a main control board case according to another embodiment. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control unit and medal count control unit of a main control board in another example. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control microprocessor and a medal count control microprocessor of a main control board in another example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a circuit configuration example of a main control board according to another embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an IC that can be mounted on a main control board according to another example. 13 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a circuit pattern of a main control board according to a further example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a circuit pattern of a main control board according to a further example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a circuit pattern of a main control board according to a further example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of electronic components that are disabled on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of electronic components that are disabled on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of DIP components that can be mounted on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of DIP components that can be mounted on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of board management information mounting on a main control board of a conventional gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example 1 of mounting board management information on a main control board according to a further example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example 1 of mounting board management information on a main control board according to a further example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a second example of mounting of board management information on a main control board according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a second example of mounting of board management information on a main control board according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example 3 of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example 3 of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example 4 of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example 4 of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of printing on a rewritable film on a main control board according to another example. FIG.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that in this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be used as an example of the gaming machine.

[1. Structure of a Pachislot Machine]
First, the structure of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the slot machine 1, and Figure 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the slot machine 1. For ease of explanation, the following explanation of the external structure may include a part of the internal structure, and the explanation of the internal structure may include a part of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged at the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged at the lower front part of the cabinet G.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that the rear wall G3 and bottom wall G5 are not shown in Figures 1 and 2. The top wall G4 of the cabinet G has two openings G4a that penetrate in the vertical direction and are spaced a certain distance apart in the horizontal direction. Wooden plate members G4b are attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to secure the slot machine 1 to the game island (not shown) when it is installed in an amusement facility, and as long as such a method of securing the fastening is ensured, it can be made of metal or resin, or can be formed integrally with the top wall G4. As long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, some or all of the components can be made of wood or resin.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space across the intermediate support plate G1, which functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and contains the main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and contains the reel unit RU, which will be described later, the main control board 71, and the like.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, as long as each device etc. can be appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, the cabinet G may not have a partition between the upper and lower spaces. The cabinet G may simply be referred to as a "box" or "main body", or, since it functions as a frame that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it may also be referred to as a "main body frame", "support body", "support frame", "fixing frame", etc.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the slot machine 1.

The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are each attached to the cabinet G so as to be freely opened and closed, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that it is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD to be openable and closable by the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

The upper door mechanism UD has a performance display window UD1 provided in the center, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the performance display window UD1. The performance display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows the performance image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes the main display device 210 (described below) provided on the rear side of the window to be viewed. Note that in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the performance through the performance display window UD1 may be described as the main performance display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 located approximately in the center of its upper part, and a reel unit RU attached to the rear side of the main display window 4, on the inside of the cabinet G.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body, and multiple (e.g., 20) patterns are drawn on the reel band at a predetermined interval along the rotation direction of the reel. In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is, for example, configured as a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (e.g., three) of the patterns on the periphery of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R can be seen. Additionally, light sources (reel lamps, which are included in the lamps and LEDs described below) are provided inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at positions where the symbols can be seen at least through the main display window 4, and at least while each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is spinning, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness, ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a sub-performance display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a performance button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-performance display unit 22 displays performance images displayed on the sub-display device 220 described below. The sub-performance display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a performance display, but also as one of the performance buttons. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that accepts performance operations (performance operations) by the player.

The lower door mechanism DD has a roughly horizontal base formed below the main display window 4, and includes a MAX BET button 6a, a 1 BET button 6b, and a settlement button 9 on the left side, a performance button 10a located roughly in the center, and a coin insertion slot 5 on the right side.

The MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b are operation units that accept game operations (betting operations, which can also be called "insertion operations" or "betting operations") by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. When the MAX BET button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (e.g., 3 medals) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than that difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than that difference or more, no medals are bet. Also, when the 1 BET button 6b is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a game operation (settlement operation) by the player to return (settle) credited medals. If the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited medals, the game unit may accept a game operation (C/P mode selection operation) by the player to select either a credit mode (C mode) in which medals inserted or paid out are credited, or a pay mode (P mode) in which medals are not credited, within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). In other words, the settlement button 9 can function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that accepts a game operation (performance operation) by the player for performance.

The medal insertion slot 5 accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from outside by a player. The accepted medals are detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not they are valid medals. If a single accepted medal is not valid, the accepted medal is returned from a medal payout outlet 11, which will be described later. If a single accepted medal is valid and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medal is returned from a medal payout outlet 11, which will be described later.

The lower door mechanism DD also has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned base. The information display device 14 is configured to include multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information related to the game depending on the lighting state of the lamps.

The lower door mechanism DD has a start lever 7 located on the left side below the base, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 located on the right side. The start lever 7 is attached so that it can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (start operation) by the player to start a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by the player to stop the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is, for example, a key cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the manager of the amusement store (for example, a store clerk of the amusement store, etc.; the same applies below) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the right to unlock the door, and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may not only have the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism, but also the function of a reset switch. For example, when the manager of the amusement store inserts the door key into the keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described below. In addition, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD can also be opened in conjunction with this, or a separate locking mechanism corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be provided so that the opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a lower panel 13 located in the center of its lower part, a medal tray 12 located below the lower panel 13, a medal payout opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound transmission holes 24a, 24b located on the left and right of the medal payout opening 11.

The lower back panel 13 is composed of a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source (lower back lamp included in the lamps and LEDs described later) for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachinko slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described later and those returned from a selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a, 24b are on the rear side of each, and transmit sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a, 35b (speaker 35a is not referenced in FIG. 2) attached to the inside of the cabinet G toward the front side of the pachinko slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the interior of the cabinet G being divided into an upper space and a lower space, but as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, they can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. They can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-rear direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors," or can be referred to as "opening and closing members," "door members," or "door members" because they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G.

[1-1-3. Variable display section]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described below are driven and controlled to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed variably. When the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (when the player performs a stop operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described below are driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed stationary.

In other words, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 constitutes a variable display section (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in multiple rows, or multiple variable display sections (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols. The variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)" or a "variable display section (means)". The symbols can also be referred to as "pictures" or "designs", and since they are information that can be visually identified by the player, they can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense.

The main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutive symbols are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas of each column (the symbols are displayed in a 3 row x 3 column format within the frame of the main display window 4). The main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as the "symbol display area" or "window section".

In addition, a winning line is defined in the main display window 4. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stopping operation. In this sense, the winning line can also be called a "winning line" or a "determination line". The winning line is also configured as a line connecting any of the areas in each column. In other words, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, a maximum of 27 winning lines can be defined. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as winning lines, and the remaining lines can be defined as inactive lines that are not winning lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the middle area of reel 3R is called the "center line", the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the upper area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "bottom line", the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "cross-up line", the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "cross-down line", and so on. Since these are lines that connect the areas of each row in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as the active line. However, as mentioned above, so-called irregular lines that connect the areas of each row with broken lines can also be defined as the active line.

In order for the active lines to be activated, the player must bet the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start the game) before starting the game. The number of active lines that are activated may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", are defined as active lines, in the former case, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are activated regardless of the number of bets, from 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" are activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are activated.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, and thus displays symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, but the symbol display format in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be one, two, or four or more, to display symbols in a format different from the above format. In this case, the number of effective lines that can be defined can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit displays the patterns by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described below, or it may be configured using other display devices (e.g., organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.). It may also be configured using other physical devices (e.g., belts, etc.). The arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main display unit directly related to the game, controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. In addition, a variable display unit may be provided as a sub-display unit related to the performance not directly related to the game, controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later. The sub-display unit may be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220. In other words, not only the main display unit but also the sub-display unit may be provided as a variable display unit that displays the patterns in response to the player's start operation (or the establishment of other start conditions) and stops the patterns in response to the player's stop operation (or the establishment of other stop conditions). In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether the variable display unit is directly related to the game or not, an identification display with characters such as "reel" or "main reel" may be attached near the main display unit, so that the variable display unit can be identified as the main display unit. Such identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion slot 5 that accepts medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by a player from outside. The medal insertion slot 5 and a selector 31 described below have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b, and such an insertion operation can be rephrased as a betting operation, for example. Therefore, the medal insertion slot 5 can be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal insertion slot can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the medal insertion slot is not necessarily a required configuration.

In this embodiment, the use of medals as gaming media is described as an example of gaming value that is used in games or awarded according to game results, but the gaming value used in this manner is not limited to this. For example, coins, gaming balls, gaming point data or tokens, etc. can also be used. Furthermore, gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "game value", etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. Note that the operation units shown below are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include operation units different from these, and operation units that are not necessarily required may not be included.

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b that accept the player's betting operation to use the medals deposited (credited) therein. Such betting operation is detected by the bet switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's bet operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but it is also possible to provide only the MAX bet button 6a without providing the 1 bet button 6b. It is also possible to provide a separate 2 bet button for betting two medals.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the start lever 7 that receives a start operation by the player to start a game. This start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection unit (means) that can detect the start operation by the player. Note that the start lever only needs to be capable of detecting the start operation by the player, and its shape, position, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and accept the player's stop operation to stop the respective reels. In addition, such a stop operation is detected by a stop switch 8S described below. Therefore, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons only need to be capable of detecting the player's stop operation, and their shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts a settlement operation (return operation) by the player to return (settle) credited medals. In addition, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S described below. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) that can detect the settlement operation of the player. Note that the settlement button only needs to be capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance buttons]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes buttons 10a and 10b for effecting a game that accepts the player's effect operation. Such effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the buttons for effecting a game. Therefore, the buttons 10a and 10b for effecting a game and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. The effect button only needs to be capable of detecting the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, two buttons for effecting a game 10a and 10b are provided, but it is possible to configure the machine without providing either of these buttons, or to configure the machine with only one of these buttons. It is also possible to configure the machine with three or more buttons for effecting a game.

The main uses of the performance buttons are to change the performance mode when a specific performance (for example, an operation-linked performance described below) is executed, and to perform selection and confirmation operations in a user menu described below. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that performance buttons are provided according to the purpose. For example, the performance buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel can be used for the latter purpose. For the latter purpose, it is also possible to configure the system so that a jog dial, cross key, or the like capable of receiving selection and confirmation operations is provided as a separate performance button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout outlet]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout outlet 11 that discharges medals that are paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. When a winning prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 awards the medals paid out from a hopper device 32 (described below) to the player, and can therefore be said to be part of a bonus awarding means that awards a bonus to the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine (described below), the medal payout outlet is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout opening 11. In other words, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) capable of storing the granted game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, this is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is provided with a lower back panel 13, which is composed of a decorative panel on which model information is drawn, and a lower back lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the rear side. The lower back panel 13 is basically intended to clearly show the player what model the slot machine 1 is, but it can also be configured as one of the performance execution means capable of executing a performance, for example, by the lighting state of the lower back lamp, or by configuring the lower back panel 13 itself as an image display device, etc.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information related to the game by its lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) that can display information related to the game.

The information display device 14 is configured to include, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an indication monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. The start lamp lights up to indicate that play can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted as a result of the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to indicate the number of medals bet. The credit lamp indicates the number of medals credited depending on how it lights up. The payout number lamp indicates the number of medals paid out according to the game result depending on how it lights up.

The instruction monitor is also configured to include a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (state display section). The notification lamp displays information on the stop operation by lighting in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information on the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, in an AT state). Note that the "manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, a manner in which the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order (which may be described as the "hitting order" in this embodiment) "1st (performing the first stop operation on reel 3L)", the number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", and the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)". Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information about the stop operation may be displayed using either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

In this way, in this embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to a player, not only the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later, but also the instruction monitor as the main-side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, notifies the information on the stop operation. The notification mode in the main-side notification means and the notification mode in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. In other words, the main-side notification means only needs to notify in a mode that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main performance display unit 21 only needs to directly notify the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in the advantageous section, described below. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, described below, the section lamp lights up at any timing before play in the advantageous section begins, and when the advantageous section ends and transitions to a non-advantageous section, it goes out at any timing before play in the non-advantageous section begins. Note that the timing of lighting the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a performance section (normal advantageous section) described below in a non-advantageous section or advantageous section to an increase section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section for the first time, the section lamp may light up at any timing before play in the increase section begins. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a performance section or an increase section, or may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section to the end of the advantageous section, including this.

The limit lamp also indicates, depending on the lighting state, whether or not a limit process described below has been executed. For example, by lighting up when a limit process has been executed, it notifies the player that a favorable state (e.g., AT state) has been forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. Also, by flashing when the execution of the limit process is imminent, it notifies the player that there is a high possibility that the favorable state will be forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, by providing triggers for lighting, flashing, or going off, it is also possible to appropriately notify other information regarding the limit process.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 that display effect images. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) capable of performing effect display. They are also configured as one of the effect execution means capable of performing effects from a visual perspective for the player.

The main display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through a display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that makes an image appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. In this embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful performance display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to perform a performance from a visual perspective for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL, or a display device such as a 7-segment LED, or it can be configured as a variable display device such as a sub reel or a dot display device. In addition, from such a perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be appropriately changed. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is a game that is primarily entertaining based on the results of the winning combination, for example, it can be configured not to have a main performance display unit 21 (the same goes for the sub performance display unit 22).

The sub-performance display unit 22 includes a sub-display unit 220. The sub-display unit 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display unit. The sub-display unit 220 can be configured as another image display unit or display unit, as with the main display unit 210, and can also be configured as a variable display unit or a dot display unit. From this perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. The main performance display unit 21 is configured as a large screen, so it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notifications, winning notifications, or continuous performances, while the sub-performance display unit 22 is configured as a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying performances that are not so closely related to the current game, such as game history. In this embodiment, the main performance display unit 21 and the sub-performance display unit 22 are configured to have two performance display units, but it is possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to configure the system to have only one of them. It is also possible to configure the system to have three or more performance display units.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (light-emitting means) that can perform effects by their light-emitting modes (not only lighting, blinking, or turning off, but also including the brightness and light-emitting color when configured as a full-color LED), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such light-emitting means is configured as one of the effect execution means that can perform effects from a visual perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc., of the light-emitting means can be appropriately changed.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, and operation unit lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter include a function to inform the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, so when this function is exercised, the light emission pattern does not change depending on the performance content, but can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission pattern.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects, background music, and the like. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute a sound output means capable of performing effects by outputting sound. They are also configured as one of the performance execution means capable of performing performances from an auditory perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like of the speakers can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production devices]
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is also possible to provide a performance device other than the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above. For example, it is also possible to provide a performance device such as a movable performance device, a vibration performance device that performs a performance by vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by injecting air, and perform a performance. In other words, any of the performance devices that can perform a performance that can appeal to any of the five senses of the player (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allowing the player to recognize that a performance is being performed) can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" indicates that a performance may be performed using any one or more of the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above, unless otherwise specified.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a passageway through which medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 flow down, and is provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and determines whether the detected medals are appropriate medals. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are appropriate medals and the medals are in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to guide the medals to the hopper device 32 side described below. In this case, the bet number or credit number is incremented by 1. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are not appropriate medals and the medals are not in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to return the medals through the cancel chute and from the medal payout outlet 11. If an abnormality occurs in the detection of medals by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a gaming medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted gaming medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted gaming medium is proper or not. The selector 31 also constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted gaming medium internally if it is proper, and discharges it to the outside if it is not proper. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the selector 31 is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 has, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disk section that is provided at the bottom of the bucket section and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section that discharges the medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Any medals exceeding this number are guided through a guide passage provided on the top side to the auxiliary medal storage 33 (described below). If the medals stored in the bucket become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, the error state will be cleared if medals are refilled and a reset operation is performed.

The disk unit has multiple medal-shaped cutouts formed radially from the center, and the central shaft is rotated in response to a drive signal to guide medals that fit into the cutouts one by one to the discharge unit. The medals stored in the bucket unit are stirred up as the disk unit rotates. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

The count sensor detects medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is to be paid out, the disk section starts to rotate, and then the disk section stops rotating when the count sensor counts that one medal has been paid out. In this way, the correct number of medals is paid out.

In other words, the hopper device 32 constitutes a gaming media payout section (means) capable of paying out gaming media. Also, as described above, it can be said to be part of a bonus granting means for granting bonuses to players. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, which will be described later, it is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary Medal Storage]
The auxiliary medal storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The auxiliary medal storage 33 has, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S that is provided near the storage section and detects the amount of medals stored in the storage section.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released if the number of medals stored in the storage section is reduced to at least below the certain number and a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the auxiliary medal storage 33 constitutes a surplus gaming media storage section (means) capable of storing surplus gaming media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc., of the auxiliary medal storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, this is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage of 100V supplied from a power cable (not shown) into DC voltage power required by each part, as in the case of household electrical appliances, and supplies the converted power to each part. In other words, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 and reset switch 53 described below are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described below), but these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply device 34.

[1-2-5. Substrate]
The slot machine 1 includes the following boards as boards necessary for various controls. Note that the boards listed below are merely examples, and the slot machine 1 may include boards different from these boards, and may not include boards that are not necessarily required.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the rear side of the reel unit RU inside the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is housed in a main control board case (not shown) made of resin that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its state can be visually confirmed. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

The specifications of the main control board 71 are subject to various constraints, and although it is basically configured with various electronic components DIP mounted, some or all of the various electronic components may be configured with SMT mounting (surface mounting). In this case, test points may be provided to check operation using a tester or oscilloscope. Small electronic components not exceeding 6 square mm may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. The board surface of the main control board 71 may also be configured with multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is a performance control board that controls performances, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or can be configured as an opaque (or nearly opaque) case made of another material. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and various devices connected to the main relay board 73, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board separate from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to provide all the functions of the main relay board 73 to the main control board 71 and not provide the main relay board 73 unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the sub-control board 72 and various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to configure the sub-relay board 74 without providing the sub-relay board 74, by giving all the functions of the sub-control board 72, unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External common terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position (e.g., the back side of the lower space) in the cabinet G, and outputs signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. The external signals 1 to 4 can be set to have appropriate output start and end conditions, making it possible to notify the outside of the transition of the internal state of the slot machine 1 (e.g., bonus state or AT state) according to the gameplay. The external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, so that these devices can recognize not only the medal insertion/payout status and error occurrence status in the slot machine 1, but also the transition status of such internal states.

(Test machine interface board)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the Pachislot machine 1 (note that these relay boards are not installed in the Pachislot machine 1 as a product released for sale, so the main control board 71 for sale does not have various electronic components required for connecting to the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine.). For example, test signals for controlling main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and test signals related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 are output via the second interface board 302 for the test machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of the pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game. The main control circuit 100 is composed of, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), etc. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for sending various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, etc. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, all game actions are controlled.

The sub-control board 72 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 200 as a performance control unit that controls performance. The sub-control circuit 200 is configured to include, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, etc. In addition, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201, various data tables, various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub-display device 220, lamp data related to the lamp/LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub-RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for registering the performance content and various performance data determined by the execution of the control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71. The random numbers for the effects may be generated and extracted within the sub-CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be generated and extracted by providing a random number circuit similar to the main control circuit 100. Also, instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, a sub-ROM may be included within the sub-control circuit 200, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub-ROM. Also, various performance data may be stored in the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and various data tables may be stored in the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200. Also, the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to include a microprocessor dedicated to images such as a GPU (e.g., also called a "VDP"), which may be used to generate (edit) images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, the key switch 52 for setting, the reset switch 53, the role ratio monitor device 54, the external central terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and the power supply device 34 are electrically connected to the main control board 71. The door opening/closing monitor switch 56, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, and the information display device 14 are also electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73. If the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

Note that the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first test machine interface board 301, and second test machine interface board 302 have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear with a predetermined reduction ratio, and the driving of the motors rotates and stops each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a certain angle, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and manages the symbol positions of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on this counting result. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index.

The setting key switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the slot machine 1 (for example, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the slot machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage the player has in playing the game, and normally, the lower the setting value (for example, closer to setting 1), the lower the degree of advantage the player has, and the higher the setting value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage the player has. The setting key switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator at the gaming facility inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turned off when the switch is returned from the counterclockwise position to the initial position. When the power of the slot machine 1 is off, the settings can be changed by turning the setting key switch 52 on and then turning the power on, and the settings can be confirmed by turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power of the slot machine 1 is still on.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the manager of the gaming establishment. The reset operation is an operation for releasing various error states. The reset switch 53 can also detect a setting value determination operation by the manager of the gaming establishment when the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated when the setting can be changed, the setting value increases by one each time it is operated (when it reaches setting 6, it returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. The setting value determined in this way is confirmed when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S can detect a setting value confirmation operation by the manager of the gaming establishment. In this way, when changing the setting, a setting change operation is required, such as turning on the setting key switch 52, operating the reset switch 53 to select a setting value, operating the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value, and then turning off the setting key switch 52. This is one example of a setting change operation, and the setting can also be changed by other operations. Also, when changing or checking settings, the current setting value may be displayed, for example, on the credit lamp or payout number lamp mentioned above.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is, for example, composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game that is tallied and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used when the manager of the gaming facility checks whether the Pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. In addition, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or for switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information may be displayed. In addition, assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitor device 54. Also, immediately after power is turned on or after a predetermined time has elapsed since power is turned on (for example, about 10 seconds; a buffer time that takes into account the time required for the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to start up), in order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LEDs of the role ratio monitor device 54 are functioning normally, it is desirable to configure it so that it lights up (or blinks) for a predetermined period of time with a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs are lit).

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the top two digits display the type of the ratio information, and the bottom two digits display a value (%) indicating the ratio information. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information, etc.

The specific section ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in a play section (for example, AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified (or it may simply be the number of plays in an advantageous section) among the play sections of the target number of plays (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative", 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games", the same below). In addition, the continuous feature ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB) (including the operation of the first type special feature (RB) when the feature continuous operation device (BB) related to the first type special feature is in operation) among the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. In addition, the feature ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB), the second type special feature (CB), and the normal feature (SB) to the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. Here, the operation of the first type special feature (RB) includes the operation of the first type special feature (RB) in a state in which the feature continuous operation device (BB) related to the first type special feature is in operation, and the operation of the second type special feature (CB) includes the operation of the second type special feature (CB) in a state in which the feature continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special feature is in operation.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player was notified can be regarded as the operation of the role or the operation of the role continuous operation device, and can be the subject of aggregation and calculation in the respective ratio information. In other words, the role ratio monitor device 54 is sufficient as long as it appropriately displays the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. In addition, for example, in the case of displaying continuous role ratio information in a model that does not have a first-class special role (RB), or in the case of displaying specific section ratio information in a model that does not have an advantageous section function (AT function), in a model in which the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information) does not exist, when the corresponding item is displayed, it is desirable to display a non-corresponding information identification display such as lighting two vertical bars in the center, for example, "- -", in the last two digits of the 7-segment LED that displays the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, so that the person checking can recognize at a glance that the corresponding information does not exist.

The door open/close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may be provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. A similar door open/close monitoring switch may also be provided on the upper door mechanism UD. The door open/close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state. When the door open/close monitoring switch 56 turns on, a door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub-display device 220. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and a group of speakers such as speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, performance buttons, lamps/LEDs, and speakers have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is installed, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, in the same way as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. It is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by making it possible for such monitoring to be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is also possible to store the opening/closing history of the lower door mechanism DD for a certain period of time. This opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the door being opened after the arcade manager has left outside of business hours, or if there is a history of the door being opened for a long period of time during business hours, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has occurred.

[3. Functional flow of the Pachislot machine]
Next, a functional flow of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram for explaining a functional flow of the slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and operates the start lever 7 (a start operation is performed), a single random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination determines in advance the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the pay line. The types of combinations of symbols include "winning" combinations that give the player benefits such as the payout of medals, the activation of replay, and the activation of bonuses, and other so-called "losing" combinations. The combinations that are related to the payout of medals are called "minor combinations", the combinations that are related to the activation of replay are called "replay combinations", and the combinations that are related to the activation of bonuses (bonus states) are called "bonus combinations". The combinations that can be internally won (i.e., the combinations of symbols that are permitted to be established) are sometimes simply called "combinations". The internal winning combination may also be referred to as a "winning combination," a "predetermined result," or a "derivation allowable condition," etc. The internal lottery means may also be referred to as a "combination determining means," a "winning combination determining means," a "predetermining means," or a "derivation allowable condition determining means," etc.

When the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (a stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (main CPU 101 which performs the reel stop control process described later) controls the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the order in which the stop buttons are pressed) when the stop buttons are pressed. Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one like the start lever 7, and may be any operation means as long as the player can perform the start operation. Also, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button-shaped one like the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and may be any operation means as long as the player can perform the stop operation.

In the pachislot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reel rotates within this specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that allows the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of usually 190 msec (four symbols) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line as much as possible. The reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed on the winning line. The symbols displayed when the reels stop spinning are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result". The display of symbols when the reels stop spinning is sometimes referred to as "deriving the stop display" or "deriving the display result".

The reel stop control means may also be configured to perform automatic stop control to automatically stop each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reels started spinning, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. In this case, since the reels will stop without the player's stop operation, it is desirable to stop the spinning of the reels so that no winning symbol combinations are displayed along the pay line, even if any internal winning combination has been determined.

When all the reels have stopped spinning in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 101, which performs the winning operation determination process described below) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line is a winning combination (or other predetermined combination). That is, it determines whether a winning combination (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved. Then, when the winning determination means determines that the displayed combination of symbols is a winning combination (or other predetermined combination) (that is, a winning combination (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved), a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed in response to this. In the pachislot machine 1, as an example, the above series of steps is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means may determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line corresponds to any of a plurality of combinations of symbols that have been determined in advance, or may determine whether the combination corresponds to a combination of symbols related to an internal lottery role determined by the internal lottery means. In other words, in the former case, it may determine whether the combination of symbols related to a winning role is separate from the internal lottery role. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately controls the reels to stop, the prevention of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, and the control burden related to erroneous winning detection can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, by determining whether the combination of symbols related to a winning role is a combination of symbols that was permitted to win, if an erroneous winning occurs due to a reel malfunction, the erroneous winning can be detected, and security can be improved.

In addition, in pachislots, during the sequence of game operations described above, various effects are produced using the display device (e.g., main display device 210, sub display device 220, etc.), the light output from various lamps (e.g., upper lamp 23, etc.), the sound output from speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are effect execution means that execute the effects. Note that the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can be effect content determination means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is sampled in addition to the random number value for the internal lottery. When the random number value for performance is sampled, the performance content determination means determines by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions) the performance to be executed this time from among multiple types of performance contents associated with the internal winning combination.

Next, when the presentation content is determined by the presentation content determination means, the presentation execution means executes the corresponding presentation in conjunction with each trigger, such as when the reels start to spin, when each reel stops spinning, and when it is determined whether or not a prize has been won. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing presentation content associated with an internal winning role, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning role (which can also be expressed as the combination of symbols to aim for or the order in which buttons should be pressed, etc.), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of Pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to perform a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and stationary manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp which symbols are located at which positions on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores data for identifying the types of symbols at each symbol position on at least each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as such a purpose is achieved, the data configuration can adopt various configurations, and in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example.

The symbol arrangement table specifies symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19") indicating the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Data for specifying the type of symbol (e.g., a symbol code) is also associated with each symbol position data. The symbol arrangement table also specifies that the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of symbol types, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-2. Design Combinations]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the slot machine 1 can provide various benefits, move from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or move from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such combinations of symbols. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for identifying such combinations of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, the data configuration can adopt various configurations, and in this embodiment, the below-described symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) is used as an example.

The symbol combination table specifies data (e.g., "display role" or "win activation flag") indicating the type of combination of multiple predefined symbols among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the winning line. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be specified, for example, using the symbol code described above. Each symbol combination is also associated with data indicating the type of bonus (e.g., "payout, etc."). The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. The number of types of symbol combinations, or the content of the bonus, can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal lottery]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed so that which combination of symbols is permitted to be displayed (predetermined) affects the game result. That is, the slot machine 1 is capable of determining the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of benefit that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance of) the player's stop operation. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. For this reason, data for identifying such an internal winning combination is specified in the main ROM 102. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example.

The internal lottery table specifies data indicating the types of multiple predefined internal winning roles (for example, "No." or "winning number") and lottery values that determine each internal winning role in each game state. The lottery values may vary depending on the set value that is set. Each internal winning role is also associated with a type of (corresponding) pattern combination that is permitted to be displayed. Note that in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate multiple pattern combinations with one internal winning role, and when such an internal winning role is determined, the pattern combination that is displayed is determined by the stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment described later (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (e.g., 0 to 65535) by a random number circuit is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value specified corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result has overflowed). Then, for a given internal winning combination, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after this determination has been made for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination for this game will be a "lose". Note that this is merely one example of the internal lottery process, and various methods can be used for the lottery process as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random number value may be sequentially subtracted and updated by a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then the internal winning combination may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is below 0 (whether the lottery result has underflowed).

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the larger the lottery value specified for an internal winning role, the higher the probability of it being determined (winning probability). The winning probability of each internal winning role can be expressed as "lottery value specified for each winning number / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed such that the game result is affected by which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning role. That is, the slot machine 1 is capable of performing control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of the combination of symbols finally displayed not only by the type of the determined internal winning role, but also by the timing of the player's stop operation and the order of pressing (also called "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning role according to the player's stop operation mode. For this reason, data for specifying such a mode of stop control is specified in the main ROM 102. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, a stop table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used as an example.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbols (for example, the "number of sliding pieces") is specified for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose that a specified stop table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Next, suppose that a stop operation is performed on the reel 3L during rotation. At this time, suppose that the stop start position (the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". And suppose that the number of sliding pieces specified for the symbol position data "0" in the specified stop table is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at a symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") that has moved by four symbols (the planned stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table specifies data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Also, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally called "table control".

The attraction priority table specifies data (e.g., "attraction priority order") indicating which symbol combination is to be preferentially displayed (attracted) when there are multiple symbol combinations permitted to be displayed. For example, assume that a specified attraction priority order table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Here, the specified internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the specified attraction priority order table specifies attraction priorities such that symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over symbol combination A. Next, assume that a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. At this time, assume that the stop start position is "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 searches for the presence of the symbols constituting the symbol combination A and the symbols constituting the symbol combination B for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If only the symbols constituting the symbol combination A are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If only the symbols constituting the symbol combination B are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol constituting the symbol combination B, since the symbol combination B is displayed preferentially over the symbol combination A. Note that the pull-in priority order may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority order table, or may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position when a stop operation is performed on the target reel. Also, such a data configuration is merely one example. In addition, using such a pull-in priority table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "control control."

In this embodiment, the stop control can be configured to be executed by performing only "table control" or by performing only "control control". Alternatively, the stop control can be configured to first tentatively determine the stopping position by performing "table control", then search for a more appropriate stopping position by performing "control control", and then change the stopping position depending on the search results.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the combination of symbols that will ultimately be displayed on the pay line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning role (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is a "miss," then none of the combinations of symbols related to any replay role, combinations of symbols related to minor roles, or combinations of symbols related to bonus roles will ultimately be displayed on the pay line. Note that a "miss" can be considered to be one of the internal winning roles, or it can be considered to be a lottery result in which no internal winning role has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols (pressed position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning roles is won as a result of the internal lottery process, if the symbols that make up a combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed are positioned on an active line (or on each active line if there are multiple active lines) for more than four symbols, the combination of symbols may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "miss."

The third element is the player's push order (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning role associated with a combination of multiple symbols may be determined, and in this case, the combination of symbols that is ultimately displayed on the winning line may vary depending on the player's push order. Such an internal winning role is called a "push order role", and if it is a replay role, it may be called a "push order replay", and if it is a minor role, it may be called a "push order minor role".

[4-5. Game Status]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to provide a desired gaming experience, it is possible to provide various gaming states as a state in which the game is played. An example of the gaming state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a bonus role is won and a symbol combination related to the bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). It is also possible to configure the machine not to provide such a bonus state. It is also possible to configure the machine to provide multiple bonus states by providing multiple types of bonus roles. When a bonus role is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role over multiple games until the symbol combination related to the bonus role is displayed on an active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes called a "carry-over role". Also, such a carry-over state is sometimes called a "(bonus) flag interval" or "(bonus) internally in progress", etc.

The bonus state is a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery mode of the minor role (including the probability of winning and its contents, or the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies below) compared to a state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state) (since it is also a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery mode of the replay role, the bonus state can also be considered as one mode of the RT state described below). Therefore, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state is a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is a less advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include a first type special role (RB), a role continuous operation device (BB) related to a first type special role, a second type special role (CB) (but not a carryover role), a role continuous operation device (MB) related to a second type special role, and a normal role (SB) (but not a carryover role). For example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus role are configured as follows. The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of winnings (e.g., the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined arbitrary number of games (e.g., the upper limit is 12 times) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when more medals than a predetermined arbitrary number of payouts (e.g., the upper limit is 285 medals) have been paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when more than a predetermined number of medals have been paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153 medals) or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played.

The condition for the bonus state to be activated is not limited to the display of a combination of symbols related to the bonus role on the pay line. For example, during the operation of the consecutive activation device (BB) related to the first type special role, the first type special role (RB) can be automatically activated when the consecutive activation device (BB) related to the first type special role starts to operate, when the game starts when the first type special role is not in operation, or when the operation of the first type special role ends. In other words, it is possible to control the RB to be in operation at all times during the operation of the BB without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB during the operation of the BB is sometimes called "JAC" and the like, and the specification in which the RB automatically operates during the operation of the BB is sometimes called "auto JAC". Also, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the RB to be in operation when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the pay line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the corresponding combination of symbols in this way is sometimes called "manual JAC". The same applies to the relationship between the special feature continuous operation device (MB) for the second type special feature and the second type special feature (CB). In other words, it is possible to control the CB to be in operation at all times while the MB is in operation without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, and it is also possible to control the CB to be in operation when the specified combination of symbols related to the CB is displayed on the winning line while the MB is in operation.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an RT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay role can be changed with respect to a state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is less advantageous than the non-RT state. In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to between the multiple RT states. In this case, an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively favorable to the player may be referred to as a "high RT state" or a "high probability re-play state", and an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively unfavorable to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state" or a "low probability re-play state".

The RT state can be transitioned, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are satisfied. In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to transitions between the multiple RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won; (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed; (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends; (4) When a specific combination of symbols is displayed when RB, BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and the player is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state; (5) When a predetermined number of plays have been played after the transition condition of (3) or (4) is met.

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an AT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple AT states are provided. The AT state is a game state that is configured as a more advantageous state than a state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order role is won.

When multiple AT states are provided, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by making the play period for each AT state (including the ease of extension if the period can be extended (or "topped up"; the same applies below)), the type of target role for which information on a stop operation is notified, or the occurrence probability of notification of information on a stop operation different from each other. In addition, the transition conditions and end conditions for the AT state can be set appropriately according to the gameplay (excluding end due to execution of the limit process described below). In addition, the AT state may be treated as if it were the bonus state described above, in which case it may be called a "pseudo bonus state", etc.

In addition, the play period of the AT state may be managed by the number of games (play count) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game count management), or may be managed by the number of sets with a predetermined number of games as one set (set count management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in number of coins) during the AT state (payout number management, difference in number of coins management). It may also be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals in the AT state (for example, push order navigation when a push order minor role is won) (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. The play period granted when transitioning to the AT state and the play period granted when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. In addition, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to transition to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (to activate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means an AT state that is performed in a high RT state, the ART state differs from the AT state in that at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and control is performed to transition to the high RT state (or to avoid transition to the low RT state), but the basic control is the same as the AT state (if the information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and as a result the high RT state is transitioned to (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). In addition, when the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the ART state may be transitioned to the AT state first, and then to the high RT state, or the ART state may be transitioned to the high RT state and the AT state simultaneously (or approximately simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other game states]
In addition, the pachislot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) described later is a state in which the player plays a game, and can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state as a pseudo bonus state, so these can be considered as game states. From a similar perspective, for example, a game state can be provided that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to a bonus state. For example, when a bonus role is won (carried over), a game state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is more likely to be displayed by stop control and a game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus role is less likely to be displayed relatively than this can be provided so that the degree of advantage of the player can be changed. In addition, for example, it is possible to configure the game so that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied by providing a game state in which a bonus role is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus role is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win).

In addition, the following methods can be adopted as a method for varying the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether or not to extend the play period of the AT state while in the AT state; the same applies below). For example, a "special role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for the special role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order of pressing the buttons, or a combination of these) (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), eight medals are paid out, and if it is inappropriate (incorrect), one medal or none is paid out).

If the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, then no decision is made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage of transitioning to an AT state in the current game to a more favorable one (this may also include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the AT state; hereafter referred to as "advantage decision"). On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, then that advantage decision is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, then that advantage decision is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, then that advantage decision is not made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays using a specific game method, it is possible to configure the system so that, as a result of the game, an advantageous decision is made in the current game, or the advantageous decision is not made (the advantageous decision is restricted). Note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue into the next game and beyond, there is a risk that the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions only apply to the current game and not continue into the next game and beyond. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Playing area]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent excessive gambling, it is possible to provide various game zones as game states with concepts different from the above-mentioned game states. An example of such a game zone is explained below. The game zone is roughly divided into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period during which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or when an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, a non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described below is executed in the favorable zone (i.e., when a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the favorable zone game number counter or favorable zone payout counter described below) that is updated as play progresses during the favorable zone becomes a specified value (e.g., 1,500 games or 2,400 coins)), a non-favorable zone is set as the initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referenced, and if the predetermined value becomes a specific updated value even before it becomes a specified value, a non-favorable zone may be set using that as a condition. Also, when a predetermined termination condition is met during the favorable zone and the zone is determined to end (e.g., when a lottery for the end of the favorable zone is held and the lottery is won), a non-favorable zone may be set using that as a condition.
(4) In a non-advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone) can only be performed by referring to the determined internal winning role, and processing cannot be performed by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning role, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone before transition). Note that which internal winning role has been determined can be determined by referring to data that directly indicates the internal winning role, such as a winning number, or by referring to data that indirectly indicates the internal winning role, such as a sub-flag (where multiple roles are treated as one determination target data) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning role.
(5) The non-advantageous zone is basically in state 1, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous zone. For example, it is not possible to set different states, such as the non-advantageous zone after the end of the advantageous zone being non-advantageous zone A, and the non-advantageous zone after the setting change being non-advantageous zone B.

(Advantageous Zone)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period during which the player can be notified of advantageous stop operation modes, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to inform the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, it is not possible to set the advantageous zone as the initial state.
(3) If the limit processing described below is executed in a favorable zone, the favorable zone must be terminated.
(4) In the advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether or not to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous zone, or whether or not to extend a specific game state (mode)) can be performed not only by referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games played during the advantageous zone. Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of the stop operation of any of the reels, or the push order.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous zone. For example, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that is easy to transition to an AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when a stop operation is performed according to the notification can be set. In addition, for example, a CZ premonition state that is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the CZ state in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, and a premonition performance that suggests the transition to the CZ state can be performed, or an AT premonition state that is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state in response to a decision to transition to the AT state in the normal state or the CZ state, and a premonition performance that suggests the transition to the AT state can be performed, can also be set according to the gameplay.
(6) The fact that the vehicle is in a favorable zone can be notified by lighting up the zone lamp (status display unit) that can notify whether the zone is a non-favorable zone or a favorable zone (if the zone lamp is off, it can notify that the vehicle is in a non-favorable zone). As described above, the timing at which the zone lamp starts to light can be set to any timing. Basically, the zone lamp may start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone and continue to light up until the vehicle moves to the non-favorable zone, or the zone lamp may not start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (the favorable zone has started) and the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in a normal state, and may start to light up when the vehicle first enters the AT state. If the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in the AT state, the light may start to light up from that point on.

[4-7. Limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the advantageous zone from continuing too long and becoming excessively gambling-oriented, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period during which the advantageous zone continues. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter." In this embodiment, the end of the advantageous zone by such a limiter is described as the execution of a limit process or the operation of a limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of plays) in the advantageous zone reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous zone game number counter described later starts counting when the advantageous zone starts, and increments the count by one each time one play is played. Then, based on the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended (for example, even if the play period of the AT state remains) and a transition is made to a non-advantageous zone. Note that the number of games that activates the game number limiter can be set to any number of games as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "1500". In addition, when the requirements for such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of games in the advantageous zone.

(Payout limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone reaches "2400". For example, the favorable zone payout number counter described later starts counting when the favorable zone starts, and adds the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). Then, based on the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the favorable zone is forcibly ended (for example, even if the game period in the AT state remains), and the zone is shifted to a non-favorable zone. Note that the payout number at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any payout number as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". In addition, when the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone.

Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may be configured to count the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone as the lowest point (starting point) (i.e., the count is subtracted if there is no payout). In other words, the payout number limiter may be configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals have been paid out since the medals increase during the advantageous zone (for example, when the AT state begins). Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may simply count the actual payout number (i.e., the number of medals paid out without subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals), rather than the net increase mentioned above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit process of the advantageous zone using only the game count limiter, may execute the limit process of the advantageous zone using only the payout number limiter, or may execute the limit process of the advantageous zone using both the game count limiter and the payout number limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous zone when the activation condition of either one of the limiters is satisfied after the advantageous zone has started.

The types of limiters are not limited to the game count limiter and payout number limiter described above. For example, a navigation count limiter may be provided that executes limit processing when the number of times push order minor roles are navigated during the AT state (i.e., the number of times information on stop operations advantageous to the player is notified for roles related to the payout of medals) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., "400" times). In other words, as long as gambling can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External Signals]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be capable of outputting a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device can also perform the bonus state performance linked thereto. Also, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, turned off based on the end of the BB state, turned on based on the start of the MB state, and turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display device can not only perform the above-mentioned bonus state performance, but also count the number of bonuses by type.

Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when an AT state is started, and turned off when the AT state is ended, then an AT state performance linked to this can be performed on the external data display.Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, and external signal 2 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, then not only can the external data display perform the above-mentioned AT state performance, but the number of ATs can be counted by type.

For example, if the AT state is configured as an AT state managed by the number of sets, and external signal 1 is turned on when the first set of the AT state starts, and external signal 2 is turned on each time the second set and subsequent sets start, the number of first hits in the AT state and the number of times the AT state is extended can be counted on the external data display. The timing for turning on and off each external signal can be set as appropriate. In other words, as long as the situation is properly recognized by the external data display or hall computer, the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state until it turns off again, such as a predetermined time, during one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. Commands]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed to be capable of transmitting multiple types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that the slot machine 1 does not allow the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to communicate with each other, and is required to communicate only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200 at appropriate times to notify the sub-control circuit 200 of changes in the state of the slot machine 1. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting values, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning role, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters that specify the contents of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts to rotate, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters that specify that the reels have started to rotate, etc.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position where the reel is stopped. Also, for example, when all reels are stopped and the displayed role (winning activation flag) is confirmed, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of displayed role and the content of the bonus to be granted. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is started, a favorable zone start command is sent. The favorable zone start command is configured to include parameters that specify the start of the favorable zone and the mode (game state), etc. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is ended, a favorable zone end command is sent. The favorable zone end command is configured to include parameters that specify the end of the favorable zone and the cause of the end. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns, etc. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be sent as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be not sent.

[4-10. Direction]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to increase the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to provide the intended gameplay, it is possible to execute various effects using various effect devices. An example of such an effect will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 (main side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the user of information on the stop operation by the instruction monitor, and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect may be performed in which the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time (the game operation of the player is disabled for a predetermined period of time). Such an effect is called a "lock effect (or simply "lock")" or a "freeze effect (or simply "freeze")". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a lock effect is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of lock effects are performed.

The gaming operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if a start operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after all stop operations have been performed. For example, if a stop operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after a start operation has been performed. If multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the game progress is stopped (the period during which the player's gaming operation is invalidated) and the type of gaming operation to be invalidated may be set for each lock effect.

(Reel production)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed by the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (including not only the variable display mode but also a combination with the stopped display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such effects are called "reel effects" as well as "symbol effects", etc. Note that it is possible to configure the machine so that such reel effects are not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, when it is said that "a lock effect is performed (executed)", this also includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In short, the reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern that performs such an output operation without considering the rotation speed or the maximum number of sliding pieces. Furthermore, by setting multiple operation patterns, multiple types of reel effects can be provided. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects with multiple types of lock effects, an even wider variety of output patterns can be set. Note that any one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effects.

(Pseudo-game)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a performance may be performed in which a pseudo game is played during the execution of the above-mentioned lock performance. Such a performance is called a "pseudo game." It is possible to configure the machine so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, when "a lock performance is performed (executed)," this also includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In short, pseudo-games accept the player's game operations in a simulated manner during a period in which the player's game operations are invalid, and perform effects by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In other words, the above-mentioned reel effects are further performed by incorporating the player's game operations. Note that, for example, the MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of game operations, and therefore it is not desirable to use them for any other purpose. However, pseudo-games allow these operations to be accepted, on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistaking that they are playing an actual game.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described with an example. The pseudo game is carried out, for example, in the following manner.
(1) The player's actual start operation (when the execution conditions are met, the pseudo game begins)
(2) Each reel rotates in a simulated manner (during simulated play)
(3) Accepts a pseudo-stop operation, which temporarily stops each reel (during pseudo play)
(4) After a random delay process, each reel actually starts spinning (the pseudo game ends and the actual game begins).

The random delay process is a process that randomly generates a delay period for each reel before starting its rotation (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period") to correct the situation where, for example, if certain symbols are displayed in a line in the above situation (3) and the reels start to rotate normally in the above situation (4), the player may be more likely to use the certain symbols as a marker to stop the reels (this may be an aid to the so-called "eye-pressing" technique). In addition, when the reels are temporarily stopped in the above situations (3) and (4), it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always less than a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) so that the reels are alternately changed between forward and reverse directions, so that they are not mistaken for being completely stopped.

One of the measures mentioned above is, for example, to slightly vibrate (swing) each reel up and down when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situation (3) (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and then all reels are temporarily stopped) until the random delay process is started in the above-mentioned situation (4). Note that, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging may not be performed when the first reel is temporarily stopped and when the second reel is temporarily stopped.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is provided to notify the player that a pseudo game is being played, and the pseudo game lamp is turned on from when the pseudo game starts in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the random delay process starts in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo game lamp is preferably installed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and in a position that is visible during play. The pseudo game lamp is preferably an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and the entire display unit of the pseudo game lamp is preferably covered with a monochromatic border. The pseudo game lamp is preferably such that the display range, including the explanatory portion of the pseudo game lamp, has a certain surface area (for example, one side is more than 10 mm and the surface area is more than 642 square mm, etc.). In addition, it is preferable that the description of the pseudo game lamp is written so that it can be recognized that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp to notify that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY", "pseudo game performance in progress", or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is preferable that such description occupies at least 1/3 of the surface area. Note that the pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game display to inform the player that a pseudo-game is being played may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) from the start of the pseudo-game in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the start of the random delay process in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo-game display is preferably displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and at a position that is visible during the game (in this embodiment, since both the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, either one may be used). In addition, it is preferable that the display range of the pseudo-game display, including its explanatory portion, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm when the display screen is less than 7 inches, and the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen when the display screen is 7 inches or more). Additionally, it is desirable for the explanatory portion of the pseudo-play display to be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo-play display is intended to inform the player that a pseudo-play is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY," "pseudo-play performance in progress," or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is also desirable for the explanatory portion to be large enough for the player to read without being obscured or otherwise hidden.

Also, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the above-mentioned situation (1) to the start of the random delay processing in the above-mentioned situation (4)), it is desirable to configure so that information on the stop operation is not notified on the instruction monitor (if it is necessary to display information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from misunderstanding that an actual game is being played during the pseudo game. Note that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo game, information on the stop operation may be notified on the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220). Similarly, during the pseudo game, the sub-side presentation device may perform a presentation according to the game result of the pseudo game (linked to the pseudo game operation).

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output through the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during a pseudo game, a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during a pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be output to enable the test machine to recognize that a pseudo game is being played. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 may output a signal for controlling the pseudo game progress to the main control board 71 so that the pseudo game progresses on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the first interface board 301 for the test machine may have a pseudo game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine has such a pseudo game progress function, a switch capable of switching the function on and off may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the content of the simulated game during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the player of information on the stop operation by the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a performance that is completed in the current game (i.e., ends in one game) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a normal performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of normal performances can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a performance that continues over a number of games (i.e., continues for a number of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous performance" or a "continuous performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of continuous performances can be performed.

(Operation-linked effects)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect can be performed in which the effect content can be changed according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect" or a "button effect" or the like. Note that it is possible to configure the device so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or to configure the device so that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. In addition, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or as a continuous effect. In addition, the effect operation can include not only an operation on the effect button group, but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or notify the set value, internal lottery role, game status, game section, bonus content, and the period until the bonus is granted. They can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage in these areas. These uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
In the pachislot machine 1, it is also possible to perform effects other than the various effects described above. For example, various notifications (e.g., addiction prevention notification, loss prevention notification, error state notification, demo state notification, etc.) to players or gaming establishments that are used for purposes other than those described above are also included in the effects in a broad sense. The addiction prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued when the advantageous zone ends. The loss prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued when the advantageous zone ends or when a settlement operation is performed. The error state notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued from the time an error occurs until it is resolved. The demo state notification can be, for example, a notification that the machine is vacant when a period of no play reaches a predetermined period or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, referring to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications related to the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine". Note that, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to the other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and, further, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the other gaming machines in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to the first gaming machine described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be the invention according to this embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the "center line" mentioned above. In addition, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state includes a 2BB flag interval in which the "F_2BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in the two-coin bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") described below is carried over, a 3BB flag interval in which the "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in the three-coin bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") described below is carried over, and a non-flag interval in which no bonus role has been won (not carried over). In addition, the bonus state includes a 2BB state to which a transition occurs in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state to which a transition occurs in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB.

The first gaming machine allows players to play with two medals bet (two-bet state) and three medals bet (three-bet state). Note that "betting" includes the player inserting two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 5 for play, the player operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet two or three medals from credits, and the player automatically betting two or three medals when a replay role is won.

[5-1. Gaming Characteristics of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 8. Note that Figure 5 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in the first gaming machine, Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine, and Figures 7 and 8 are diagrams showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the states in which the player plays are broadly divided into non-advantageous and advantageous zones, and the advantageous zones are further divided into presentation zones (advantageous zone, normal play) and increase zones (advantageous zone, pseudo bonus). The non-advantageous zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. The presentation zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player, similar to the non-advantageous zones, but differ from the non-advantageous zones in that mode transitions are performed, as described below.

In other words, the non-advantageous zone is the control state in the initial state that is controlled when play in the advantageous zone ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the machine is shipped from the factory, etc., and the performance zone is the control state in the normal state in which the player plays normally, making it possible to vary the expectation of a transition to an increased zone (award) by mode transitions, etc.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is an advantageous game state for the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by transitioning between these sections, a series of advantageous sections are formed.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described later). The sub-flag is information for grouping internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are lottery-eligible roles and their winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries related to playability by the main control circuit 100 (various processes related to the advantageous zone) and assigning the same information to the group, making it possible to identify the group. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning role, making it possible to compress the amount of data and avoid straining the capacity of the main ROM 102. In the non-advantageous zone, a lottery is held using this non-advantageous zone sub-flag.

The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Rip Bell" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to "33"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Determined Cherry" (No. "6") and "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "middle cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Note that the non-advantageous zone can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined, just like the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the correspondence between these is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described below). Furthermore, in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols. In the advantageous zone, a lottery is held using these sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone.

The sub-flag "Bell" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "Weak Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "Watermelon" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "Definite Role" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Definite Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The sub-flag "Middle Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 1" for winning in the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Right Up Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Right Up Rip"). The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 2" for winning in the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Parallel Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), a "Right-Rising Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 3BB flags, and a "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 2BB flags and non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Tsu Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 3BB flags, and "Tsu Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 2BB flags and non-flags. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below (for example, the pseudo bonus transition lottery using the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) and the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f)) is changed.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as an example of a role in which the sub-flag changes when the player enters a favorable zone depending on whether the sub-flag is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. However, the manner in which the sub-flag changes when the player enters a favorable zone is not limited to this. For example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different between the 3BB flag and the 2BB flag. Therefore, when such a role is won, the number of medals paid out may not change (or may change), but the combination of the displayed symbols may be different, and a different sub-flag may be determined when the player enters a favorable zone. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be changed depending on the difference in the sub-flag when the player enters a favorable zone.

Also, for example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag interval (non-flag interval) it is, if the pressing position (stop operation timing) is appropriate, the "watermelon" symbol combination is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a miss occurs and the "watermelon spill" symbol combination is displayed. Therefore, when such a role is won, different sub-flags for winning the advantageous zone may be determined depending on whether a win is achieved without a miss or whether a miss occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be changed depending on whether the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is different.

Also, for example, when the internal winning role is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), if the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner (this specific manner may be, for example, a manner in which the stopping operation is performed in a predefined hitting order (correct pressing order), a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stopping operation) is appropriate, or a manner in which a combination of these is performed) between the 3BB flags, a combination of symbols of "parallel replay" is displayed, and if the stopping operation is not performed in the specific manner, a combination of symbols of "right-up replay" is displayed, and different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone may be determined based on this. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on the different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone.

In other words, the first gaming machine allows the final stop display mode for a specific combination to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, and allows different secondary information to be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby applying all the modes that allow the degree of advantage to be changed.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the non-advantageous zone, a lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is held for each game. Specifically, the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(b) is referenced, an internal winning combination is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the game after the non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination, the transition mode, etc. is determined according to the non-advantageous zone sub-flag. Note that, when making this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode when transitioning to the advantageous zone is determined ("Advantageous Zone Start" in FIG. 5), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined ("Advantageous Zone Start + Pseudo Bonus Start" in FIG. 5). However, it is also possible to design the game so that a transition to a pseudo bonus is not determined in the non-advantageous zone.

Now, referring to FIG. 6, the various modes in the first gaming machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as the game state or control state) for varying the expectation of a transition (award) to an increase zone (pseudo bonus) in the presentation zone (normal play), and in the presentation zone (normal play), it is according to this mode that a transition to a pseudo bonus or not is determined, a favorable zone is maintained, or a favorable zone is ended and a transition to a non-favorable zone is determined.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode in which a player is likely to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone (performance zone), and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) described below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) described below). Although not shown in the figure, in the start mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games." The ceiling game number is used to forcibly transition to a pseudo bonus when a certain period of time has elapsed without transitioning to a pseudo bonus. Therefore, the smaller the ceiling game number, the more advantageous it is for the player, and the higher the ceiling game number, the more disadvantageous it is for the player.

The normal A mode is the mode in which players are most likely to stay when playing, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, so the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7 (c) described below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8 (f) described below). In the normal A mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games". In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the game transitions to the end A mode or end B mode described below, and 32 games are played in that mode without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and after transitioning to a non-advantageous zone once, if the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, the apparent ceiling game number is "965 games" + the play period "32 games" in the end A mode or end B mode + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, so this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normal B mode is a mode in which players tend to stay relatively longer while playing, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the Heaven Preparation Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), but the ceiling number of games is set at 466 games, and if a transition is made to a pseudo bonus, it is guaranteed that the mode will transition to Heaven Mode after the end of the pseudo bonus (see Figure 8 (f) below), making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense.

In Chance mode, the expectation of moving to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games," so in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see Figure 8 (f) below).

End A mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to remain if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, and the expected rate of transition to a pseudo bonus is the lowest (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expected rate of transition to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In End A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone.

End B mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to stay if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, but it is more favorable than end A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In end B mode, like end A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone. End A mode and end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end modes".

The guaranteed mode is the mode in which you stay when Heaven C mode ends, and since the expectation of moving to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see FIG. 8(f) below). In other words, in order to prevent a drop in interest when Heaven C mode ends, the guaranteed mode is positioned as one that aims to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time.

Heaven A mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to be consecutive (if the AT state is designed to continue by deciding to extend (add) during the AT state, this may also include the extension (addition) of the AT state; the same applies below), and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) described below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a moderate level, making it a relatively advantageous mode. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, it is possible to set a difference in the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the lottery value can be set so that the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is also possible to set different ceiling mode loop rates.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below). The ceiling number of games is set to "32 games." Also, it is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set quite high. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is a more advantageous mode than heaven A mode and heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that the above modes are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. Modes other than the above modes can be set, and some of the above modes can be chosen not to be set.

Up to this point, the non-advantageous zone has been described as being in a state where the degree of advantage is relatively low compared to the advantageous zone, but the relationship between the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone is not limited to this. For example, the non-advantageous zone may have a higher transition rate to the increasing zone than the advantageous zone when at least one mode is set, or the average number of games required to transition to the increasing zone may be shorter, or the non-advantageous zone may be the zone that is most likely to become the increasing zone. By doing this, an incentive to play is created even in a state where it is confirmed that the zone is a non-advantageous zone after a setting change, etc., so that it is a motivation to start playing even from the time the store opens. Even if the zone lamp stops lighting when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not confirmed that the zone is in the most disadvantageous state, so that it is a motivation to continue playing even in such a case. Up to this point, the performance zone has been described as a game state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, but if it is in a state that is disadvantageous compared to the increasing zone (for example, by lowering the frequency of notification or changing the role that is the subject of notification), it can also be a game state in which information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the presentation section (normal play), first, for each play, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referred to, an internal winning role is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the internal winning role, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In FIG. 7(c), "non-winning" means that there is no transition to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the current play, and "winning (next play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the next play.

In the first gaming machine, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, game operations (stop operations) are invalidated for a certain period of time at the start of the current game, and if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, a reel effect in which "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 (a "red 7s aligned" effect) is performed, and then a pseudo bonus is started. In a game in which a "red 7s aligned" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and game operations (stop operations) become enabled (it may be before that, but not before the above-mentioned random delay process is started).

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) in the performance section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that this transition mode may be a mode including the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), mode transition lottery (when winning), and mode transition lottery (when reaching the ceiling) described below are not held.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play), then for each play (more specifically, in a play in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is drawn), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a win occurs) is held by referring to the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referenced to determine the winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play (before the start of the next play) after the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone is determined according to the winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone.

In the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), the probability of deciding to transition to a pseudo bonus is higher when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that a transition to a pseudo bonus will be made, but when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent a transition to a pseudo bonus from being determined.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) in the performance section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. Note that this transition mode may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held, the mode transition lottery (when ceiling) described below is not held.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), the probability of deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher when "Tsū-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the player will be transitioned to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, but when "Tsū-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the player from deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play), the ceiling game number is updated (this can be by addition or subtraction), and if the ceiling game number reaches the ceiling game number associated with the current mode (or determined in advance when transitioning to a favorable section, etc.), a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined. In this case, it is possible to always determine a "winning lottery (current play)" or to always determine a "winning lottery (next play)." It is also possible to have either of these be determined by lottery.

When the ceiling number of games is reached during the presentation section (normal play) and it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode. This destination mode may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processing related to the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) and the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing is the same, so they can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.The processing related to the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) and the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing is the same, so they can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.

Also, if "Winning lottery (played this time)" is not set as a type of pseudo bonus winning lottery, then at the time the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is determined, the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone has already been determined, and the ceiling game number can also be updated, so the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), and the pseudo bonus transition processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed together in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), the mode transition lottery (when winning), and the mode transition lottery (when the ceiling is reached) can also be performed together in a single process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine, as described above, when a decision is made to transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play) and the pseudo bonus starts ("pseudo bonus start" in FIG. 5), the game transitions to the increase section (pseudo bonus). Also, as described above, when the presentation section (normal play) is controlled to end A mode or end B mode and 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus ("end of advantageous section (via ends A and B)" in FIG. 5), the game transitions to a non-advantageous section. Also, when the conditions for the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met, the advantageous section is forcibly ended ("end of advantageous section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, the game transitions to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is held when the pseudo bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the ceiling number of games after the pseudo bonus ends depending on the current mode. In FIG. 8(e), "non-winning" means that the ceiling number of games will not be shortened, and "winning (updated ceiling number of games = 0)" means that the ceiling number of games set will be set to "0" (shortened) after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. The ceiling shortening lottery can be held not only when the pseudo bonus starts, but also every time the pseudo bonus is played.

If the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will not be shortened, and if the player does not have a 1G consecutive stock (described below) when the pseudo bonus ends, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous zone ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the performance zone (normal play) begins. On the other hand, if the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will be shortened, the ceiling game number will be set to "0 games" when the pseudo bonus ends. This means that the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, the pseudo bonus will start when the ceiling game number is reached, so the mode transition lottery (at ceiling) described above will be performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn is determined to be "guaranteed role" or "medium chain"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that the transition mode may also be determined when a sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn other than the above. In this case, however, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the transition mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when a win is won) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone. In this case, as with the above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive draw is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive draw table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive draw will occur is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn or the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. In FIG. 7(d), "non-win" means that a 1G consecutive draw will not occur, and "win (1G consecutive + 1)" means that one right to generate a 1G consecutive draw (1G consecutive stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that multiple 1G consecutive stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (accumulated) by the 1G consecutive stock counter. Therefore, multiple 1G consecutive stocks may be granted during one pseudo bonus. The 1G consecutive draw table can also be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive stocks can be granted in one 1G consecutive draw.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or more (i.e., if you have 1G consecutive stock), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus starts according to the right of 1G consecutive stock, the mode transition lottery described above is not held. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more (i.e., if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), and if you have not won the ceiling shortening lottery described above, the ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the game moves to the performance period (normal game).

In addition, if a player wins the ceiling shortening lottery and also has 1G consecutive stocks, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks, or the 1G consecutive stocks may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening. In the latter case, information that allows the existence of a ceiling shortening to be carried over may be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo bonus) is given as an example in which it continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be won, but the configuration of the pseudo bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus may be configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)" and a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" that continues for "22 games" and allows a maximum of 110 coins to be won may be installed. In this case, when it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus (to grant the right) in the pseudo bonus transition lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type (e.g., whether to make it a "pseudo BB" or a "pseudo RB") may be decided with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50% each). In addition, the "pseudo RB" may have a different value from the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, a lower value than the "pseudo BB"). For example, the number of continuing games may be the same as the "pseudo BB", but the maximum number of coins that can be won may be different by lowering the Bernavi rate (probability of announcing information on a stop operation). When the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect may be performed in which the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the main display window 4, or a reel effect may be performed in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuing games (play period) can be changed.

In addition, if the conditions for executing the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous zone due to limit processing" in FIG. 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous zone.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played with three coins bet. Therefore, when playing with two coins bet, for example, various lotteries using (a)-(d) in FIG. 7 and (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when playing with two coins bet during a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is not an increase period because the machine is configured so that medals do not increase when two coins are bet. In other words, the first gaming machine is basically configured so that the player is at a disadvantage when playing with two coins bet.

Here, when playing in the two-coin bet state, no lottery (for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) or processing (for example, updating of the ceiling number of games, etc.) is performed for the advantageous zone (AT), but it is desirable to update the advantageous zone game number counter for the game number limiter described above and the advantageous zone payout number counter for the payout number limiter described above. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone and the upper limit of the number of coins won. If these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, there may be cases where the upper limit of the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone or the number of coins won set by the intervention of play in the two-coin bet state, and as a result, gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. Therefore, it is desirable to configure the limiter counter so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of coins bet.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically premised on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in a bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when the bonus state is entered during a pseudo bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-bonus state with 3 medals bet), so the pseudo bonus may not be an increase period. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing in a bonus state may put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured to recommend playing in the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags may be described as the "recommended gaming state", and other states may be described as the "non-recommended gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus role that can only be won in the 2-coin bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between 2BB flags only wins in the 2-coin bet state, and does not win in the 3-coin bet state. Also, 3BB is a bonus role that can only be won in the 3-coin bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between 3BB flags only wins in the 3-coin bet state, and does not win in the 2-coin bet state. Also, 3BB does not win between 2BB flags, and 2BB does not win between 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, by using these configurations, for example, in a 2-coin bet state with no flags, if you win 2BB (without winning 2BB) and enter a 2BB flag state, and then play in a 3-coin bet state, it becomes possible to play in the recommended game state described above without worrying about whether or not you will win a bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, a ceiling shortening lottery is held during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is either the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, or the heaven C mode, there is a probability of 1/8 (32/256) of winning the ceiling shortening lottery, whereas in other modes, there is no winning the ceiling shortening lottery. In other words, in a mode where the ceiling game count is "32 games," the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games," and in a mode where the ceiling game count is greater than that, the ceiling game count is never shortened.

Even in the case of a mode in which the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," it may be determined that the ceiling number of games will be shortened with a lower probability (e.g., 1/64) than in the case of a mode in which the ceiling number of games is "32 games."

Furthermore, the manner in which the ceiling number of games is shortened is not limited to the above. For example, the same effect can be achieved by shortening "32 games" to a fewer number of games (0-31 games). Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won may be determined, or the number of games to be shortened in the ceiling shortening lottery may be determined in advance.

The trigger for the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during a pseudo bonus, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous zone (normal play), when the current mode is any of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. In these cases, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag and advantageous zone winning sub-flag are referenced to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

As mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is held during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it can be seen that a 1G consecutive stock may be awarded regardless of the current mode. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be awarded regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling game count of "32 games" or not.

The manner in which the right is granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode in which the ceiling number of games is "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may not be conducted in consideration of the fact that a ceiling shortening lottery will be conducted, and in a mode in which the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted, thereby preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-oriented.

The trigger for the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G consecutive lottery may be performed in advantageous zones (performance zones) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G consecutive stocks accumulated as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the pseudo bonus starts or during the pseudo bonus, a special bonus performance is executed with a predetermined probability to suggest that the current mode is the heaven mode and that the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, the player can expect that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. This special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus performance is executed at the start of the pseudo bonus, it is suggested that the player is at least in the heaven mode, and the player can be made to have a sense of expectation that the ceiling shortening lottery may also be won. This special bonus performance may also be executed with a predetermined probability or 100% probability when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, various possibilities can be suggested, such as (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening lottery, (3) Heaven mode + 1G consecutive lottery, (4) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening lottery + 1G consecutive lottery, (5) 1G consecutive lottery only, etc., which can increase the interest of the game.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) will be controlled back to an advantageous state within a predetermined period (e.g., 32 games) after the end of the advantageous state (e.g., in the case of heaven mode), that period may be further shortened, so that even if the playing period of a series of advantageous zones is limited (e.g., when limit processing is executed), it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by allowing the player to play in as advantageous a state as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not certain that the advantageous state will be restored within a predetermined period of time after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of end mode), the advantageous state may be restored by granting a right (for example, 1G consecutive stock), which can heighten the player's expectations and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Determined Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and when the result of the mode transition lottery described above is that the mode transition to Heaven C mode is decided, a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Note that, even when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefit as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, so when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, a special lock effect may be executed in the same way as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also determines the transition to the pseudo bonus (see FIG. 7(c)), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can recognize that the transition to the pseudo bonus and the transition to the Heaven C mode have occurred, which is very interesting for the player. The special lock effect is configured as an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalid for about 20 seconds at the start of the game, for example. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Also, a special song that is not normally output may be output. Of course, the effects may be performed by a combination of these. Also, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects may be performed until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player may decide whether to execute the effect to the end or to cancel it midway and continue the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described below, even if the player is in Heaven C mode, the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process, so it may not be desirable to execute the above-mentioned special lock effect multiple times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous zones. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the special lock effect for the first time within a series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is executed, but thereafter, even if the same conditions are met within the same series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is controlled not to be executed. As a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and when the information is stored within the same series of advantageous zones thereafter, the decision on whether or not to execute the special lock effect may not be made in the first place, or the decision may be made, but when the information is stored, even if the decision result indicates execution, it may be rewritten to indicate no execution. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous zone ends.

The manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit on the number of times the special lock effect can be executed may be set to "two times" or "three times" rather than "one time." In other words, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set to multiple times. This can be set appropriately depending on the expected number of balls per special lock effect.

The conditions for determining whether or not to execute the special lock effect are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is triggered by the winning of a "fixed role", and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, since there may be cases where a transition to Heaven C mode is caused by factors other than the winning of a "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a determination may be made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect in these cases as well, and it may be determined that the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when the winning of a "fixed role" is the trigger, or may be a different probability).

For example, when a "guaranteed role" is won, a decision may first be made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock effect will be executed, a transition to Heaven C mode may occur. In other words, the special lock effect may be executed in response to a decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or a transition to Heaven C mode may be initiated in response to a decision to execute a special lock effect.

In addition, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous zone may be used as a condition for determining whether or not to execute the special lock effect. For example, when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter or the control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter or the control payout number counter described below is less than "1201", a determination as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect is made as described above, and when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter or the control game number counter described below becomes "750" or more, or when the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter or the control payout number counter described below becomes "1201" or more, it is possible to prevent the determination of whether or not to execute the special lock effect from being made in the same series of advantageous zones thereafter.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the play period of a series of advantageous zones is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16 described below). Furthermore, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) is set multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game while preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous zones, the winning of a specific role (e.g., a "fixed role") may trigger control to a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus), and control information that is highly favorable to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if such an event occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that a special effect (e.g., a special lock effect) is not performed each time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game while preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

The first gaming machine is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is won) according to the determined internal winning role, and is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered) according to the combination of symbols displayed, and is capable of determining whether or not to grant a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operation is notified, according to the secondary information determined for each.

In this way, the first gaming machine can provide a sense of expectation regarding the award of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined, but also when a combination of symbols is displayed, thereby diversifying the gameplay regarding the award of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination are managed as common secondary information, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), the first special role (e.g., 3BB) can be won, but the second special role (e.g., 2BB) cannot be won. In addition, when the gaming value bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific role (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is selected, a combination of predetermined patterns (e.g., "Right-up replay") is displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is selected, a combination of specific patterns (e.g., "Parallel replay") is displayed (see FIG. 15 described below).

The first gaming machine is capable of determining different secondary information when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. In other words, the first gaming machine can vary the content of the determination regarding the granting of an advantageous state depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific role is determined, and therefore can further diversify the gameplay while preventing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific winning combination is won.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to replay, the same privilege of activating replay is awarded regardless of which one is displayed.

The manner in which the same benefit is awarded is not limited to the above. For example, the specific role is configured as a specific minor role related to the award of game value. Then, when the specific minor role is won, for example, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined patterns (a combination of patterns related to the award of game value equivalent to a "right-up lip") that awards a game value of one coin (this value is arbitrary and may be another value less than the bet game value, or may be a value exceeding the bet game value) is displayed, and in the second special permission state, a combination of specific patterns (a combination of patterns related to the award of game value equivalent to a "parallel lip") that awards the same number of game values as when the combination of predetermined patterns is displayed is displayed.

In addition, both the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols may be configured as "miss" symbol combinations (however, in order to be able to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state, it is necessary to make it possible to distinguish that the combination of symbols is different from the case of a pure "miss"). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the decision content regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place, even when the same specific role is determined, so that the gameplay can be diversified while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state. Furthermore, in a game in which a specific role has been determined, the same benefit is granted regardless of which special permission state is in place, so that even when the gameplay is varied, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a direct disadvantage.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won and the second special permission state is in effect, it may be configured so that it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, and not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the specific manner.

In addition, it may be possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific role is won. When a specific role is determined as an internal winning role, it may be possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different between when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and when a specific combination of symbols is not displayed.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

In this case, the specific combination can be configured so that, on at least one reel, a specific symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position O" or "correct press position", etc.), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stopping operation is inappropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position X" or "incorrect press position", etc.). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (the timing), which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and increases the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, the specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressing position is ○), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded on at least one reel, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is greater than the specific number. Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is less than the specific number. Also, at least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only makes it possible to vary the degree of advantage in terms of granting an advantageous state based on the player's stopping operation (or the timing of that operation), but also makes it possible to vary the direct content of the bonus, allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and further diversifying the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific role, the timing for the appropriate timing of the stop operation is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate timings for the stop operation. For example, on one reel, a first specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a third timing different from the first timing and the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

In this case, the special role can be configured so that a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press order is correct), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is inappropriate (when the button press order is incorrect). This allows the degree of advantage in terms of the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (procedure), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (when the push order is correct), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded, and when the batting order is not appropriate (when the push order is incorrect), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). The specific number may be awarded a game value that is greater than the specific number. The specific number may be awarded a game value that is less than the specific number. At least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only makes it possible to vary the degree of advantage regarding the award of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also makes it possible to vary the content of the direct benefit, so that the player can concentrate more on the game, and the gameplay can be further diversified, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific role, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the left, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the center or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the center, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the right, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or center, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

So far, we have mentioned that in a unit game in which a specific combination has been won, the process of determining whether a non-advantageous zone will transition to an advantageous zone and the process of determining whether an advantageous state will be granted in an advantageous zone (including pseudo bonus transition lotteries, mode transition lotteries, and other processes for changing the degree of advantage of the game situation in an advantageous zone) change due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order). However, among such changes, any change that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may ultimately result in an disadvantage) can be considered as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that any presentation (warning notification) can be generated to call the player's attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the possibility of an advantageous state being awarded is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. In other words, assuming that three coins are bet, the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is a state in which the award of an advantageous state is favored more than the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined role (for example, the "push order bell B" described below) is won, if the first special permission state is selected, the combination of symbols to be awarded (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 8 coins) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while if the second special permission state is selected, if the batting order is the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is not displayed, resulting in a miss where no game value is awarded, or a combination of symbols to which less game value is awarded than when the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 1 coin) is displayed. In other words, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the award of game value is favored more than the second special permission state.

In other words, if a player plays in a 3-coin bet state between 3BB flags even in a non-recommended gaming state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is not favored, but the probability of obtaining a gaming value when an advantageous state is not activated is favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when an advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility of the player being able to suddenly increase the gaming value, is reduced, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays in the recommended game state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of obtaining game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is more likely to be able to rapidly increase his or her game value, but in which the player's game value is likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "rough sea state."

Here, the method of creating the two states, the stable state and the rough sea state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is increased in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "rough sea state", while the transition probability of the heaven mode is decreased in the mode transition lottery described above compared to the "rough sea state". Also, in the "rough sea state", the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is decreased in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state", while the transition probability of the heaven mode is increased in the mode transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state". In this way, in the "stable state", a state can be created in which it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but difficult to win consecutive wins, and in the "rough sea state", a state can be created in which it is difficult to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but easy to win consecutive wins. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined role may vary between the 2BB flag and the 3BB flag, or may be different from this (i.e., not favoring the 3BB flag).

[5-2. Symbol Arrangement Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first gaming machine, ten types of symbols, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and "white blank 2", are arranged in the positions shown in Fig. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Also, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal lottery winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 15. Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Figs. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination of the first gaming machine. That is, the following will explain the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine, and which symbol combination (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode (i.e., the hitting order, the stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described below, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 10. Also, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a symbol combination related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a symbol combination related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a symbol combination related to a minor role.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when playing in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with 2 bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when playing in a 3 bet state. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2 bet state, or in a game in which it is a "lose" between 2BB flags, if the pressed position for each reel is ○, "BB01" is displayed and the state transitions to 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB). On the other hand, in a 3 bet state, even between 2BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with three bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a two bet state. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a three bet state, or in a game in which a "lose" occurs between 3BB flags, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, "BB02" is displayed and the game transitions to the 3BB state (bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, in a two bet state, even between 3BB flags, "BB02" will not be displayed.

In the 2BB and 3BB states, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referenced to determine the internal winning combination (only three coins can be bet to start playing). In the 2BB and 3BB states, the RB, which is a first-class special combination, is always in operation (RB state). The RB state is repeatedly controlled to end once and then activate again if two wins occur or two games are played after it is activated. In the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated as more than one medal being paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is stipulated as more than 176 medals being paid out in the 3BB state.

Here, when the 2BB state or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when transitioning to the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, since no mode transitions occur during the bonus state), i.e. the current mode, is "start mode", the mode to transition to will be "start mode". Also, if the current mode is either "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", or "chance mode", the mode to transition to will be "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the mode to transition to will be "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", or "heaven C mode", the mode to transition to will be "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and 2BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, any of "REP64" to "REP72" (these are collectively called "parallel reps" because they display the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in the middle row. Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively called "lower row reps" and "REP72" can be called "middle row reps") is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, "REP73" (this is a replay symbol that displays the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the upper right direction, so it can be called a "right-up reps") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in a three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in a two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, a "parallel replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in either state, and a replay is granted.

In a non-bonus state, "F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. It can be configured so that it can be determined as an internal winning role in a three-coin bet state, but not determined as an internal winning role in a two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, a "middle row replay" is displayed in a two-coin bet state regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In a three-coin bet state, if the push position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these can be collectively referred to as "cherry replays" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other replays (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Definite Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. It can be determined as an internal winning role in a three-coin bet state, but can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in a two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, a "middle row replay" is displayed in a two-coin bet state regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In a three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4," any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are used to display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and since symbols that can increase the player's expectations, such as "REP42," are also displayed on other reels, these can be collectively referred to as "definite cherry replays") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the button is pressed at an X position, other replies (such as the above-mentioned "Cherry rep" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed and a replay is granted. Also, if the button is pressed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", a "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that, although it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. When it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the push position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are collectively referred to as "middle cherry lip" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other lips (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. Additionally, if the push order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay will be granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Reach Eye" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode in the two-coin bet state, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4," any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are configured as combinations of symbols that can, by convention, definitely notify (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "Reach Eye Lip") is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded. Also, if the push order is any of "batting order 5" and "batting order 6," a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

In a non-bonus state, "F_watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the push position for each reel is ○, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are collectively called "watermelon" because they display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and if three coins are bet, three medals are paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, one of "FRU08" and "FRU09" (these are collectively called "watermelon spill" because they do not display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and one medal is paid out. Note that if the push position is ×, it can also be configured so that a spill occurs and zero medals are paid out.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning roles in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor role with six options (one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order), and if it is determined as the internal winning role, and a stopping operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Downward Right Bell" ("FRU03"), "Top Row Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Row Bell" ("FRU04"), "Upward Right Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Hill Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Bottom Row Bell" ("FRU07"). If three coins are bet, eight medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determined as internal winning roles in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor role between the 3BB flags in the 2-coin bet state and the 3-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals are paid out in the 3-coin bet state, and 2 medals are paid out in the 2-coin bet state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the "Push Order Bell B" is a push order minor role in states other than between 3BB flags in the 3-coin bet state (between non-flags in the 3-coin bet state, between 2BB flags in the 3-coin bet state), and when it is determined as an internal winning role, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed and 8 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct push order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operation will have a 1/2 probability of being a push position ○, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the remaining stop operation will have a 1/8 probability of being a push position ○, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is an X, a miss will occur and no medals will be paid out.

The "8 F_RB" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, one of the "bells" described above will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and 8 medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB 1 coin" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning role, any of the above-mentioned "1 coin roles" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one medal is paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations, etc. shown in FIG. 15 are merely examples, and are not limited to the modes shown here.

For example, in the first gaming machine, a "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when there is a pure "miss"; when in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed, "BB01" is missed and becomes a "miss"; when in a 3-bet state where "BB02" can be displayed, "miss" occurs when "BB02" is missed and becomes a "miss"; when there is a 3-bet state between 2BB flags; when there is a 2-bet state between 3BB flags; when there is a "miss" when "push order minor role" is missed and becomes a "miss". Therefore, in order to change the combination of symbols displayed as a "miss" in some or all of these cases, these different combinations of symbols are specified in advance in a symbol combination table, and these are also allowed to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the determined internal winning role, so that the combination of symbols related to the "miss" displayed can be changed depending on the situation, etc.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, each limit processing of normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing (number of games), and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and limit processing other than each of these limit processings can be executed, or some of these limit processings can be prevented from being executed.

Normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches 1500 or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous zone). The advantageous zone game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous zone (including the presentation zone) starts, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The advantageous zone game number counter also counts in the 2BB and 3BB states.

When the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), regardless of whether it is during the presentation period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and transitioned to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information about the advantageous period (for example, information for controlling the presentation period or increase period, information about the current mode, information about the pseudo bonus play period, information about the ceiling game number and whether the ceiling has been shortened, the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter, and various information obtained during the advantageous period and various information required to control the advantageous period) is also cleared (initialized).

Normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the favorable zone payout counter becomes "2401" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone exceeds 2400). The favorable zone payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (difference)") from the start of the favorable zone (including the performance zone), and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The favorable zone payout counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The favorable zone payout counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. The favorable zone payout counter also subtracts a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-2" or "-3", etc.) when a "miss" or "miss" occurs during the favorable zone. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the favorable zone, the value may become negative (or it may be configured to always remain "0" if the value becomes negative). In other words, the favorable zone payout number counter is capable of counting from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone to the defined highest point (difference in number of medals: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), regardless of whether the player is in the performance period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and the player transitions to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive plays have been played during the favorable zone). The control game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the favorable zone (including the presentation zone) starts, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three coins, and does not count when the number of bets is two coins. The control game number counter counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state. However, the control game number counter can also be configured in the same way as the favorable zone game number counter.

When the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increase period), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period is forcibly ended accordingly and a transition is made to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period described above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the pseudo bonus transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the player has transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information regarding the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note here that the value of the advantageous zone game number counter where normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1445". Since the maximum number of games played (continuation period) during a pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (number of games) is executed when a predetermined restricted period of play has been played in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming too high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, which may reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (number of games) is executed in a game that is one possible continuation period (55 games) per increased zone before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per two increase sections (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + grace period (2 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in the case of a specification in which a premonition state is passed through before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this premonition state is "4 games," the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any time before the timing at which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable period exceeds 2125). The control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference in number of medals)") from the start of the favorable period (including the performance period), and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable period ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control payout number counter also counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. The control payout number counter also counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable zone, the control payout counter subtracts an appropriate count value according to the actual number of medals paid out (for example, "-3 medals"). However, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable zone (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out), the control payout counter counts the number of medals paid out as if no "miss" (or difference) occurred. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet three coins and win "Push Order Bell A," if the stroke order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum) will be "8 medals" (the difference in number is "+5 medals"), but if the stroke order is not appropriate and the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be "1 medal" (the difference in number is "-2 medals"), and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a missed medal will occur and the number of medals paid out will be "0 medals" (the difference in number is "-3 medals"); however, the control payout counter will count the difference in number of medals as "+5 medals" in either case in that game.

In addition, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes greater than the value of the control payout number counter due to the activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is corrected to the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. The control payout number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous zone payout number counter.

When the special limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increase period), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period is forcibly ended accordingly and a transition is made to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the aforementioned advantageous period is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the pseudo bonus transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (payout number). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the game has been transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information relating to the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note that the value of the advantageous zone payout counter where normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed (activated) is "2401", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (payout amount) is executed (activated) is "2126". Since the maximum number of coins that can be won during a pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) in the first gaming machine is "275 coins" (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be awarded during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value equivalent to a predetermined regulated game value amount is awarded in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-like. However, for example, if this normal limit process (payout number) is executed immediately after the start of a pseudo bonus or during it, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, and their interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value amount that is awarded is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increased zone (275 coins), thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending midway and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (payout number) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase sections (275 pieces x 2 sets = 550 pieces). Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per one increase section (275 pieces) + the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 pieces). In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The semi-limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and the result is "ceiling shortening enabled", then "1" is added) multiplied by "55" (i.e., the duration for which the pseudo bonus can continue), and the result of the addition is "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the result is "ceiling shortening enabled", then the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the semi-limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) when the value of the control game number counter is "1280".

The semi-limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and the ceiling shortening lottery is set to "with ceiling shortening", an additional "1" is added) multiplied by "275" (i.e., the amount of game value that can be awarded with the pseudo bonus), and the result of the addition is "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the ceiling shortening lottery is set to "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "1301". Note that since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (payout number) both perform the same restriction, once the operating condition of one is met and activated, there is no need to operate it redundantly even if the operating condition of the other is met.

When the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are not executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous zones. In other words, the extension of the play period in the increase zone is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the play period in the increase zone is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of 1G consecutive may be made lower than normal, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of ceiling shortening may be made lower than normal. In other words, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery themselves are executed, but it may be made difficult to win these lotteries. Also, for example, in the performance zone after the execution of the semi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that will be a winning lottery in the pseudo bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transition to the pseudo bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value that determines a mode transition that is advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered, making it more difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutive.

In addition, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or semi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the series of subsequent advantageous periods, during the presentation period, special processing is performed when a "fixed role" (see FIG. 7(a)) is drawn. Below, this special processing is explained using the example of the case where the "fixed role" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "Definite Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period), the "Winning Lottery (next game)" is determined in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see FIG. 7(c)). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that players have high expectations for, so in games where information on stopping operations is not announced, the general procedure is for the player to perform a stopping operation at the first left stop and aiming for the "cherry" symbol (aiming for the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when playing according to the general procedure, when a "Definite Cherry" is drawn, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped on the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "fixed cherry" is drawn, a notification may be made to the effect that the first left stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") should be made. In addition, a "winning lottery (next game)" is not limited to a lottery in which the pseudo bonus starts from the next game, but may also be a lottery in which the pseudo bonus starts from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player will perform a stopping operation, for example, aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "definite cherry". As a result, the "BAR" symbols will line up in the middle of each reel, and the player will be able to recognize that they have won a "definite cherry" (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, a player without skill may not perform a stopping operation aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, or may be unable to perform such an operation, and may not be able to determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "definite cherry" from the stopped display mode (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is operating, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is not displayed, but the symbol combination of a "cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100% or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, you will be notified that a pseudo bonus will begin when the next game starts with a "Red 7s lined up" effect, and the pseudo bonus will begin.

On the other hand, if a "confirmed cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period) after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will initially determine "winning lottery (next game)" (see FIG. 7(c)), but this determination result will be rewritten to "winning lottery (current game)" by executing a special process. Then, at the start of the current game, a "red 7s line up" presentation will be performed to announce that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will begin.

At this time, in the current game, the symbol combination of "Determined Cherry Lip" (including the symbol combination of "Cherry Lip") is not displayed, and a notification (special notification) of information on the stop operation to display the symbol combination of "Middle Lip" is made. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is made to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Determined Cherry Lip" display → pseudo bonus start from the next game, but after the activation of either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts), the game flow is changed to "middle lip" display by performing a stop operation according to the special notification from the current game. The special notification may be controlled by the main (main control board 71) side, or it may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side, from the viewpoint that the player will not suffer any disadvantage even if the result is a transition to a pseudo bonus.

In addition, if a "Definite Cherry" is drawn after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, and the "Definite Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed despite a special notification, the special winning sound will not be output.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, the procedure for the stop operation is not basically notified. For this reason, if the procedure for the stop operation is notified and the "middle replay" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, when such a state occurs, the player will clearly recognize that one of the semi-limit processes has been activated, which may result in a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous zone, regardless of whether or not one of the semi-limit processes is activated (or even after the activation of one of the semi-limit processes), if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the special notification is unnatural. Also, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Also, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a "winning lottery (current game)" may be determined with a predetermined probability.

So far, we have used the example of monitoring the play period in the favorable zone using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" to activate the normal limit process, special limit process, and semi-limit process, but the conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the favorable zone game number counter, the value of the favorable zone payout counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout counter, as well as the value of the 1G consecutive counter and the presence or absence of ceiling shortening (i.e., variables for activating the semi-limit process), etc., when each limit process is executed, can be changed as appropriate depending on the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Furthermore, the method for monitoring the play period of the advantageous zone is not limited to the above. For example, if the "number of navigations" is used to monitor the play period of the advantageous zone, normal limit processing (number of navigations), special limit processing (number of navigations), or semi-limit processing (number of navigations) can be executed in the same manner as described above. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted to monitor the play period of the advantageous zone, and by specifying the value at which normal limit processing is executed, the value at which special limit processing is executed, and the value at which semi-limit processing is executed for the adopted element, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) and the specific state (e.g., presentation zone) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is "2401" or more), the series of advantageous zones are forcibly ended. However, when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), if the advantageous state exists, the series of advantageous zones are ended when transitioning to the specific state.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather it is possible for a series of advantageous periods to end within a certain period in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessive gambling, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) and the specific state (e.g., presentation zone) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is "2401" or more), the series of advantageous zones is forcibly ended, but when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), if the advantageous state is not in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous zones is transitioned to an advantageous state, and when the transitioned advantageous state ends and transitions to a specific state, the series of advantageous zones is terminated.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous zones are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous zones within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. Furthermore, when ending a series of advantageous zones in this way, if the state is not advantageous, the system transitions to an advantageous state before ending the series. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessive gambling, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set taking into consideration the period during which the advantageous state can continue (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of gaming value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 coins"), so that it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value awarded to the player from being excessively restricted while still taking into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but when the play period in a series of advantageous zones is shorter than the specific period and becomes a special period set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the semi-limit process (number of games) is executed), or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous zones is less than the specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the series of subsequent advantageous zones. This prevents, for example, a player from being granted more rights than he or she can consume, which would result in the series of advantageous zones being forcibly ended in such a state, causing the player to feel distrustful or have a sense of loss, and thus makes it possible to consider the player's feelings while suppressing excessive gambling.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," even if a difference occurs between the amount of game value that should have been awarded and the amount of game value that has actually been awarded due to, for example, a player's operating error or ignoring instructions, this difference is not taken into consideration, and the calculation is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been awarded. This makes it possible to prevent a series of advantageous zones from being unnecessarily extended due to such player actions, and to prevent unfairness from occurring between players who have performed such actions and players who have not, making it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player while preventing excessive speculation.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a fixed combination (e.g., "fixed cherry") that confirms a transition to an advantageous state is won in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., a state after the semi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is made to prevent the display of a special symbol combination (e.g., "fixed cherry replay") that clearly indicates the winning of this fixed combination. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger that started the advantageous state in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any presentation execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is made, the advantageous state that would have started from the next game is started from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stopping operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is possible to issue a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound), but when the granting of rights is suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is not possible to issue a special notification. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that started the advantageous state when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any performance execution means may be used to issue the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the decision as to whether or not to issue a special notification is made depending on whether or not a fixed combination has been drawn, whether or not a special symbol combination has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous zone game number counter and advantageous zone payout number counter count regardless of the amount of gaming value bet, making it possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) not only in the three-coin bet state but also in the two-coin bet state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the three-coin bet state, but do not perform counting in the two-coin bet state. Therefore, in the three-coin bet state, it is possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed, but in the two-coin bet state, it is not possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed. Therefore, in the two-coin bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous periods even during a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning the minor prize and the number of medals paid out differ between the three-coin bet state and the two-coin bet state (see Figures 10 to 15), so playing in the two-coin bet state is more disadvantageous to the player than playing in the three-coin bet state. However, the method of making playing in the two-coin bet state more disadvantageous to the player is not limited to this. For example, if playing in the two-coin bet state during a pseudo bonus is played, the stopping operation procedure may be notified, making it more disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a first amount (e.g., "3 coins") of gaming value is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous periods within a certain period in a natural flow accompanying the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessively high gambling tendency, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player. On the other hand, when a second amount (e.g., "2 coins") of gaming value is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods may be forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, which makes it possible to make the player realize that he/she has not played in the intended playing method, and therefore encourages the player to play in the intended playing method.

In addition, since in a series of advantageous zones, when the second amount of game value is bet and play is performed, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the first amount of game value is bet and play is performed, by making it possible to issue such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a more advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to playing in a way that the player did not intend.

[5-5. Storage Area Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the configuration of the storage areas of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 17 to 22. Fig. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an activation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a push order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning lottery flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and pattern code storage area)
First, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 17. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the above storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the 1 byte of data in the "Data" column in Figure 17, but for ease of explanation, Figure 17 also shows the "combination" (in Figure 17, the symbols on reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R are listed in that order) indicating the symbol combination associated with the bit of each storage area, and its contents (see Figures 11 to 14).

The data stored in the winning flag storage area is used to enable the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning role (i.e., the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if it is carried over), then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the winning line in the current game). For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed on the winning line in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable identification of the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on an active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB can still be displayed on an active line while at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Carryover role storage area)
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 18. The carryover combination storage area is configured with a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus role of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is the internal winning role, these bonus roles are stored in the carryover role storage area as carryover roles ("1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover roles stored in the carryover role storage area are retained and not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. Also, while the carryover role is stored in the carryover role storage area, in addition to the internal winning roles (minor roles and replay roles) determined by the internal lottery process, the carryover role (bonus role) is stored in the winning flag storage area.

(Game Status Flag Storage Area)
Next, the configuration of the game status flag storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 19. The game status flag storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current game status is 2BB, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 does not have an area indicating the type of RT state. However, for example, when the RT state is provided, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous zone is stored in a mode flag storage area described later, but it can also be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming zones of the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone. It can be managed by providing an advantageous zone flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It can be managed by providing an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown), or it can be managed by storing in this gaming state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each of which is represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is start mode, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Also, if the current mode is heaven A mode, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the activated stop button storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 21. The activated stop button storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 of the activated stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated (type of reel that is spinning).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button that has been pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., a valid stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button that has been pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Pressing order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 22. The pressing order storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, i.e., the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all reels are spinning, a "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing sequence storage area. Next, when stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the first "left" stop), a "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but a "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. Next, when stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the first "left" stop and the second "center" stop), a "1" remains stored in bit 0, but a "0" is stored in bit 1. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing sequence for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing sequence storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 32. Note that in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the process contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the process contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

[6-1. Main Processing]
First, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. Fig. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). In this processing, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased for each unit game, such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance/start check process (S3). In this process, for example, the input state of the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, etc. is checked, and various processes required at the start of the game are performed. Details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, a random number value for an internal lottery (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and a random number value for effects (random number value for other lotteries) used in various lotteries related to gameplay (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255) are extracted, and the various extracted random number values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which the various random number values are acquired is not limited to the above. The required number of random number values can be appropriately acquired from each predetermined number range (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.).

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes are performed that are necessary to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and the internal lottery random number value according to the current game state, etc. The internal lottery process will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, when a game is started, if a transition condition for each game state is met (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the game period of the current game state. Details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32) described below. The methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the start of play (S8). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the start of play, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the start of play, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification of the pseudo game) is controlled. Also, for example, if the AT state is present and information on a stop operation is to be notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Also, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this processing, various information required for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of attraction priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination and game status, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel spin start processing (S10). In this processing, it requests that all reels start spinning. Then, when it is requested that all reels start spinning, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control processing described below (see S203 in FIG. 32), and each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts spinning. Each reel that has started spinning is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Also, although details are omitted, in this processing, a reel spin start command generation and storage processing is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case), data indicating the pull-in priority order is obtained by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table, and stored in a pull-in priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process described below is performed prior to this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, various processes necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel are performed based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control sets set accordingly) and the stop operation state of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. The reel stop control process will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a winning activation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the winning activation flag storage area. In addition, although details are omitted, this process also involves the winning activation command generation and storage process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout/replay activation process (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processes necessary to activate a replay in the next game are performed. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a process is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. In addition, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs end-of-game state control processing (S15). In this processing, when the game ends, for various game states, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the end-of-game state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the end of game (S16). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the end of game, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the end of game, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, and can also be configured not to perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, the power-on process performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on initialization process (not shown), then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 was successful (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 was successful (YES in S21), it determines whether the setting key switch 52 is on (S22). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing the setting (S23). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased when changing the setting, such as a carryover role storage area, a game status flag storage area, or a mode flag storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S24). In this process, data for an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has started and to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation or setting value confirmation operation, and then a new setting value is set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch 52 has been turned off (S26). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the new setting value has been set.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), it waits until the setting key switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S26), it performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S27). In this process, it generates initialization command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process has ended, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various pieces of information backed up when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off (power outage) are normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), it performs a game return process (S29). In this process, it performs a process to return the pachislot machine 1 to the state it was in before the power was cut off. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), it performs power-on error processing (S30). Note that errors that occur as a result of this power-on error processing are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when a new setting value is set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power to the pachislot machine 1 once, and does not proceed to normal processing (S2 and subsequent steps in FIG. 23) until a new setting value is set (until the processing of S22 to S26 described above is performed).

(Medal reception and start check processing)
Next, the medal acceptance/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the medal acceptance/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether a replay role was won in the previous unit game (whether a replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), it performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this processing, the same number of medals as were inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Also, although details are omitted, if automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing. Also, in this processing, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41) and after processing in S42, it performs auxiliary medal storage switch check processing (S43). In this processing, it determines whether the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (i.e., whether a certain number of medals or more are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33), and if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state, it generates an auxiliary medal storage error. In this case, the processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Also, if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether the acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the state becomes one in which medals can be accepted (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) (acceptance of medals is permitted). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is put on hold until the error is resolved.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the machine is ready to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that the machine is ready to accept medals (YES in S45), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the detection results of the bet switch 6S. Also, although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is possible to insert medals or to give credits (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". If the main CPU 101 judges that it is not possible to insert medals or to give credits (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the state as one in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which betting operations are not acceptable).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the game is not ready to accept medals (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that the game is ready to accept medals or credits (YES in S47), or after processing S48, it determines whether the number of medals inserted is the number that allows play to begin (S49). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the number required to start playing (YES in S49), it determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 then ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of inserted coins is not enough to start playing (NO in S49), or if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not on (NO in S50), it returns the process to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Note that Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check the setting value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets for the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the setting value, the number of bets, the game status, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the internal lottery from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in S4 of the main process described above. Note that, in this process, if it is determined that the setting value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24).

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (e.g., updated by addition) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination defined in the set internal lottery table, and it is determined whether the updated result is a predetermined result (e.g., whether it has overflowed). If it is a predetermined result, that internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for this unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all internal winning combinations, the result of this unit game will be a "lose" ("lose" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). If the main CPU 101 judges that an internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be judged (sequentially updates the random number values for the internal lottery) and repeats the process of S64 until judgments have been made for all internal winning combinations (or until an internal winning combination is determined halfway through).

When the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning role has been determined (YES in S65), it determines whether the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (i.e., a minor role or a replay role, rather than a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role in the winning flag storage area.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning role is not a role that is not eligible for carryover (NO in S66), and after processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning role is eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role to be carried over (YES in S68), it determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus roles have not yet been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S69), it updates the carryover role storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover role storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the carryover role storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning role is not a role eligible for carryover (NO in S68), if it determines in S69 that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S69), or after processing S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover role storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when a bonus role is carried over (or a winning role has been won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the winning flag storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the bonus role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing of S72, it performs a sub-flag setting process (S73). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag or an advantageous zone winning time sub-flag is set based on the internal winning role. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control process)
Next, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, a check is made as to whether or not a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state is satisfied. For example, in the case of transitioning to a flag interval as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus role, this process checks whether or not the predetermined bonus role has been won. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, the flag interval is not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so this check is unnecessary. Also, for example, in the case of a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific transition condition is satisfied and a specific number of games are played, this specific number of games can also be managed in this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set game state (S84). In this process, when it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or to set a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the game state, such setting process is appropriately performed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S82), and after processing S84, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S85), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when starting play, it checks whether the transition condition for transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (favorable zone start condition) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process, for example, involves conducting the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery, and checking whether the lottery result will start the favorable zone.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S87). If the main CPU 101 judges that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S87), it ends the game start state control process. If the main CPU 101 judges that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S87), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous zone. In this process, in response to the start of the advantageous zone, it appropriately performs setting processing such as starting counting various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes (that is, starting monitoring the game period of a series of advantageous zones).

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started favorable zone. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the set mode or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in accordance with the set destination mode, when the mode is shifted to the pseudo bonus, the play period is set to "55 games", when the mode is shifted to the end mode, the play period is set to "32 games", and when the mode is shifted to the other mode, the corresponding ceiling number of games is set. In addition, the lottery value (lottery table) in various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) is set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current play zone is not a non-favorable zone (i.e., it is a favorable zone) (NO in S85), it performs processing at the start of play in the favorable zone (S91). Details of the processing at the start of play in the favorable zone will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting play, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) is met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operating conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S93). When the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (YES in S93), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets the non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, for example, it performs initialization processing to clear all information (i.e., information about the advantageous zone) related to various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the game period of the mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control processing. Also, when the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has not been met (NO in S93), it ends the game start state control processing.

(Processing at the start of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game start processing during the advantageous period performed in S91 of the game start state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of play) (S101). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) in the advantageous zone, or various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 per game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 judges that it is in a specific mode (S102 is YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of play) (S103). In this processing, for example, when it is possible to extend the play period of the AT state (for example, extending the number of games or adding the number of sets, etc.) at the start of play, it judges whether or not the execution condition of such an extension is established, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on this judgment result (if it is possible to shorten the play period of the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and a process is performed to extend the pseudo bonus according to the lottery result.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the information of the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be included in the start command are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when a role to be notified is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur, and in this process, whether or not navigation occurs may be determined according to a predetermined condition (for example, the type of role to be notified or a predetermined probability of navigation occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the game is not in a specific mode (NO in S102) and after S104, it determines whether or not the mode transition condition is met (S105). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether or not the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, for example.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S105), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is the same as the process of S90 described above, for example. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not met (NO in S105), it ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone.

The state control process at the start of play shown in FIG. 27 and the state control process at the end of play shown in FIG. 30, as well as the process at the start of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 28 and the process at the end of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 31, are basically almost the same processing configuration. This means that for processes that may be performed either when play starts or when play ends (for example, processes that refer to a determined internal lottery role, such as a game state or mode transition, but the processing result only needs to be reflected by the time the current game ends (or the time the next game starts)), it is sufficient to perform either one, and does not mean that similar processes are performed in duplicate in both. Therefore, such processes may be performed either when play starts or when play ends.

In contrast, processing that needs to be performed when game play begins (such as the navigation setting processing described above) may be performed when game play begins, and processing that needs to be performed when game play ends (such as processing that references the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when game play ends. Also, for example, processing that needs to be performed at a specified time after game play begins and before game play ends, or processing where it is better to perform processing (such as processing that references the stop operation mode of the first stop operation) may be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Note that Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), it waits until all reels rotate at the constant speed. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), it allows each reel to stop (S112). In other words, the main CPU 101 enables each stop button. In addition, the activated stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the activated stop button storage area).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the process waits until a valid stop button is operated. When automatic stop control is to be performed, this waiting time is measured, and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (S113: YES), it updates the activated stop button storage area and the pressing sequence storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on reel 3L (when stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing sequence storage area are updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the activated stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process for determining the number of sliding pieces (S117). In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 refers to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned pull-in priority data storage area, and determines the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (amount of movement of the symbols).

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the pattern position data of the position where the pattern will finally stop based on the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the planned stop position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that can specify not only the intended stop position, but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pattern code storage process (S120). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the pattern code storage area while also referring to the type of pattern (pattern code) at the intended stopping position of the reel for which the intended stopping position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an active stop button (S121). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a reel that is still spinning (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is present (YES in S121), it performs a control change process (S122). In this process, if it is necessary to change the stop table or the pull priority table set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, for example, depending on the stop operation mode performed by the player up to this point, the various information required for such stop control is reset.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel, the main CPU 101 acquires data indicating the pull-in priority order by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table while also referring to the type of symbol at the planned stop position on the reel whose planned stop position has already been determined, and stores the data in the pull-in priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), it ends the reel stop control process.

(Game End State Control Processing)
Next, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made as to whether a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state has been satisfied. For example, when a transition to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state is made based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, this process checks whether the predetermined symbol combination has been displayed. Also, when in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, this process checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been satisfied. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks whether, for example, a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB has been displayed. Also, when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state, for example, a check is made as to whether the termination conditions for these game states have been satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, and the 2BB state or 3BB state is set. Also, for example, when the game state is in the 2BB state or 3BB state, if the end condition for these game states is met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, when it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the gaming state, such setting processes are appropriately performed. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "1", and if the 3BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "176".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S132), and after processing S134, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S135), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, in a non-favorable zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S86 described above (game start state control process).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S137), it ends the end-of-game state control process. If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S137), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S138). As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control processing at the start of game).

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous period that has started. As described above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) for the set mode or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S90 described above (state control process at the start of play).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current play zone is not a non-favorable zone (i.e., it is a favorable zone) (NO in S135), it performs processing at the end of play during the favorable zone (S141). Details of the processing at the end of play during the favorable zone will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition has been met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made as to whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operating conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the payout number during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S143). When the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S143 is YES), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets the non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, for example, it performs initialization processing to clear all information (i.e., information about the advantageous zone) related to various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the game period of the mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control processing. Also, when the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has not been met (S143 is NO), it ends the game end state control processing.

(Processing at the end of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game end processing during the advantageous period performed in S141 of the game end state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the end of play) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the payout number during the favorable zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the favorable zone, or various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the payout number, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S152). When the main CPU 101 judges that it is in a specific mode (S152 is YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this processing, for example, when it is possible to extend the play period of the AT state (for example, extending the number of games or adding the number of sets, etc.) at the end of the game, it judges whether or not the execution condition of such an extension is established, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on this judgment result (if it is possible to shorten the play period of the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S151 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process involves the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery being performed based on the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone, and processing to extend the pseudo bonus is performed according to the results of this lottery.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S152) and after S153, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S154), it updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition destination mode determined according to the result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous zone.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process involves, for example, a process similar to the process of S140 described above. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not met (NO in S154), it ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, the periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually executed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in the periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input states (on or off) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether there has been a change in the input state. If there has been a change in the input state, the change is stored in input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and input states that have not changed are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, it controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, it transmits each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In this embodiment, the various command data is temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing; however, for example, the various command data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the various command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication; however, for example, the various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, it controls the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14, etc., connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, it updates various timers managed by the main control circuit 100.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it detects whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open/close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. If various error states have occurred and if the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is open (off), a security signal is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a register restoration process (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by the Sub-Control Circuit]
Next, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the overview of the sub-side control processing.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but not so many restrictions are placed on the sub-control circuit 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can use various configurations depending on the type and number of connected presentation devices, the type of presentation performed by the presentation devices, etc., and the manufacturing costs, etc. This is why it is written "Overview" in Figure 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 201 performs power-on processing in the same manner as the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). During this processing, processing such as detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and starting various tasks required for performing various performance execution control processing described below is performed.

When the sub-CPU 201 receives a command sent from the main control circuit 100, it performs a performance execution control process when the command is received (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if the settings have been changed, the appropriate initialization process is performed on the sub side, and if the settings have not been changed, the process of restoring the sub side to the state before the power outage is performed.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referenced, and if the state is not AT, the content of the presentation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination or game state, etc. is determined (by lottery if necessary), and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if the state is AT, in addition to this, the content of the presentation that notifies the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.For example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the stop start position or the planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.For example, when a winning activation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning activation command is referenced, and if a bonus is awarded, the content of the effect linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

The sub-CPU 201 also performs a process for controlling the execution of effects when effect buttons 10a, 10b connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74) are operated (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when an effect button in accordance with an effect is operated while an operation-linked effect is being executed, the sub-CPU 201 controls various effect devices so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Also, for example, when an effect button is operated to call up a user menu (described below) while not playing, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to display the user menu. Also, when an effect button is operated to perform a selection or decision operation while the user menu is being displayed, the sub-CPU 201 performs control in accordance with these operations.

In addition, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger occurs, the sub-CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this processing, for example, when a non-operation period during which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed reaches a predetermined period (e.g., about 30 seconds), the sub-CPU 201 determines the content of the effect related to the demo state notification and controls various effect devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

[8. Other functions of Pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has various functions for controlling the game and the presentation, as well as various configurations for implementing these functions, but it can also have other functions, such as those shown below. In the following, an example of other functions on the player's side and an example of other functions on the gaming facility's side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, a user menu is displayed by the player's presentation operation, a desired menu is selected from the user menu, and then the player performs an appropriate selection and decision operation for the selected menu, enabling the player to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement and payout table" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the player to check the pattern arrangement on the pachislot machine 1, the specified pattern combination, and game information showing the payout (contents of the bonus) when the combination is won.

For example, when "Volume/Light Adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display unit, which allows the brightness of the various display devices in the slot machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers, or the light intensity of the lamps and LEDs to be set. During such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display unit, which allows the setting of the performance mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used in the performance (including the type of the character (display mode) itself, the type of voice corresponding to the character, or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character, etc.), the probability of the performance occurring (including the type of expectation when the performance occurs, etc.), or the mode of suggestion or notification (including the timing of performance execution, etc.)). Note that when setting in this manner, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

For example, when "UniMemo" is selected and confirmed, it becomes possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, etc.). With such an information provision service, for example, the player can log in to start playing (play can also be started without logging in), and by logging out when the game is over, the player can confirm or obtain game history information (e.g., information according to the results of various games, such as the total number of games played, the number of times an advantageous game state occurred, the maximum number of coins won, etc.).

In addition, for example, the game history information also includes information regarding associated benefits, such as information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during play and the type of music that can be output depending on the game result (achievement of the unlocking conditions), and information indicating the type of character that can be displayed on the player's mobile terminal and the type of music that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and out of such information provision services. For example, the player may use his/her terminal to read a two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen to log in and out, or the player may enter a password or memorize a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as a password to be entered next time, which the player can obtain by writing it down on paper or taking a photo of it with a mobile device, and when logging in before the start of the next game, the password obtained in this way can be entered). These methods can also be combined as appropriate to log in and out.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (which may be a setting change operation or other operation by the amusement facility's administrator) by the amusement facility's administrator, a desired menu is selected from the hall menu, and then an appropriate selection/determination operation is performed for the selected menu, allowing the amusement facility's administrator to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen that allows the date and time, etc. of the slot machine 1 to be set is displayed in the performance display section. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the number of coins inserted and paid out during a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the slot machine 1. For example, when "error information history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the date and time of error occurrences and their contents within a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the slot machine 1.

For example, when "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the date and time of door opening within a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the Pachislot machine 1, as well as that period. For example, when "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set the manner and frequency of various warning notifications on the Pachislot machine 1.

For example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. Furthermore, when making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation section that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation section that accepts effect operations).

For example, when "limit setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the limit function in the slot machine 1. The limit function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is met, renders the machine unplayable until the manager of the gaming establishment cancels the condition (for example, a reset operation). The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an operating zone)) ends. When the limit function is set to ON, the automatic settlement function described below may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

For example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function of the pachislot machine 1. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (i.e., all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, either the bonus state, the increase zone, or the advantageous zone (including the effect zone)) ends. When the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the above-mentioned limit function may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

When setting the limit function or automatic settlement function, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations). However, in this case, since it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, it is also possible to use only a specific operation unit (e.g., a stop button) as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings.

[9. Extension Example]
Up to this point, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to gaming machines called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines that can play games (perform gaming control) according to the game actions (operations) of the player. In addition, the configurations and functions of gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example.

(Pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine has, for example, a game board with a game area in which game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, a performance display device provided in a specified area of the game area (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to the game and performance, and these are supported by a frame body (which may also be simply referred to as a "frame" or the like).

In addition, the front side of the pachinko machine is provided with, for example, a launch handle as one of the operation means for the player, an upper tray in which game balls to be used in the game can be stored, and a lower tray in which paid-out game balls can be stored. Many pachinko machines are also provided with the above-mentioned performance buttons and movable performance devices. In addition, the game area is provided with, for example, a starting area (sometimes called a "starting hole") or a specific area (sometimes called a "V winning hole") through which the game ball can pass, a variable winning device (sometimes called a "big winning hole") that can shift between a state in which it is easy for the game ball to win and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win, and a variable display device that can variably display identification information (sometimes called a "design" or the like, including "special designs" and "normal designs").

In a pachinko machine, a player operates a launch handle to launch a game ball into a game area to play. For example, when a launched game ball passes through a starting area, a variable display is started. At this time, whether or not to transition the game state (for example, whether or not to transition to a big win game state or a small win game state that is advantageous to the player) is determined based on a probability according to the current state (for example, whether or not the game state is in a certain probability game state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area (that is, whether or not to transition the game state is determined by lottery (or judgment)). After that, when a stop condition for the variable display (for example, the set variable time has ended) is established, the variable display stops in a stop mode according to the above-mentioned determination result. At this time, if the above-mentioned determination result is one that transitions the game state (a hit), the stop mode that is stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the hit, and the game state corresponding to the hit is transitioned in response to the display result being displayed. On the other hand, if the above decision result is one that does not change the game state (miss), the display result for the stop mode also corresponds to a miss, and the game state does not change. For example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (specific areas are usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), it is decided to change the game state regardless of the variable display device.

In other words, in a pachislot machine 1, the game begins when the player bets the necessary medals and performs a start operation, whereas in a pachinko machine, the player fires the necessary game balls by operating a launch handle, and the game begins when the game ball passes through a starting area, for example. However, both machines have in common the fact that the game begins with the player's gaming action. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines also have in common that the stop mode that is ultimately permitted to be displayed (in other words, the content of the bonus to be awarded) is determined when the start trigger is met.

Furthermore, the Pachislot machine 1 basically stops the variable display by the player's stop operation, whereas the Pachinko machine stops the variable display when the stop condition is met (without the player's stop operation), which is different, but they are similar in that they both stop the variable display according to a pre-determined result and award a bonus according to the stopped state. The Pachislot machine 1 and the Pachinko machine are also similar in that they are capable of executing effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the above-mentioned effect display section or information display section. Furthermore, it goes without saying that Pachinko machines may also be provided with effect execution means such as the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other effect devices, and effects may be executed by these.

In many pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (which are sometimes also referred to as "identification information") are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device. As mentioned above, the actual game results are displayed on the variable display device, but since the variable display device is small and the display results are shown as lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for the player to recognize the game results. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed to play by varying (and stopping) decorative symbols on the performance display device in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device. And, the variable display of such decorative symbols (for presentation purposes, the variable display may start after a certain delay when the start trigger is established, or may temporarily stop before the stop condition is established) is basically the same as the variable display device described above, and displays the identification information variably or statically as the game progresses (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a special stop mode (for example, matching symbols), while in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a non-special stop mode (for example, scattered symbols)). Therefore, it is possible to apply the invention according to this embodiment to this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied to the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of a pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced by game balls, etc.).

In pachinko machines, various controls related to the game are performed by a main control circuit acting as a game control unit implemented on a main control board (including some payout-related controls that may be performed by a payout control circuit implemented on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to the presentation are performed by a sub-control circuit acting as a presentation control unit implemented on a sub-control board. Therefore, the various items described as the electrical configuration of pachinko machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those that have characteristics unique to pachinko machine 1 (for example, those related to the stop operation, etc.).

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 can provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration), such as a bonus state, an RT state, an AT state, and an ART state that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, the lottery mode for the small role is made more advantageous than the non-bonus state, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time; in the RT state, the lottery mode for the replay role is made more advantageous than the non-RT state, making it possible to continue a state in which losses are less likely to occur (and, as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time; and in the AT state, a favorable stop operation mode is notified, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

In contrast, pachinko machines can also provide various game states with similar characteristics. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to transition to a state in which game balls are more likely to win, and thus making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes called an "electric support state"), normal symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to create a state in which game balls are more likely to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of lottery draws by the variable display device and making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are less likely to decrease for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a probability-variation game state, special symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to continue a state in which the variable display device has a higher probability of winning (as a result, game balls are more likely to increase) for a certain period of time.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various matters described as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state of a Pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the Pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that involve transitions between play zones, etc.). The same applies to the various other matters described as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in pachinko machines, it is possible to switch to the time-saving game state when the number of plays in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) reaches a specified number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that can switch to a favorable state (e.g., time-saving game state) as a relief from being stuck if an unfavorable state (e.g., normal game state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without switching to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot game state)). Therefore, the various matters described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko machines.

In addition, in a pachinko machine, when the stop state of the variable display device during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) becomes a display result corresponding to a specific miss, this can trigger a transition to a time-saving game state. In other words, a transition (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot game state, etc.) is possible in a pachinko machine as well, due to the display of a specific display result (specific combination of symbols). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as configurations related to a transition (transition) to an RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols in a pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as configurations related to a transition (transition) to a time-saving game state due to the display of a specific display result in a pachinko machine.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, play begins with one of the starting conditions being the player's betting operation (i.e., inserting held medals into the medal insertion slot 5 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet credited medals), and if medals are to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout outlet 11, or the medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all forms in which a player bets the gaming value required for a game, plays the game based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded based on the result of the game (e.g., gaming value is awarded). In other words, the invention can be applied not only to forms in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and medals are paid out by the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachislot machine 1 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner in which the player cannot directly touch the gaming value), allowing for medal-free play. Here, such a pachislot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medal-less gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself, or by a game value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal count control board") that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). An example of the installation of this game value management device is described below.

The game value management device is a device equipped with at least a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM) and installed in the slot machine 1, and is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be described as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be described as a "connection terminal board"). The game value management device performs necessary communication with the external game value providing device, and can perform a game value lending operation (i.e., an operation of providing game value required for a player to perform a game value betting operation), a game value granting operation (i.e., an operation of providing the game value related to the grant to the player when a winning combination related to the grant of game value (the combination is established) is won), and an operation of electromagnetically recording the game value provided by these operations. The game value providing device is sometimes called a "game value (game medium) handling device," "game value (game medium) lending device," or "sand."

The external gaming value providing device is also connected to an external ball dispensing management device (ball dispensing management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to transmit ball dispensing management information to the external ball dispensing management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball dispensing management information is composed of various pieces of information necessary to enable the external ball dispensing management device to manage dispensing balls. An example of ball dispensing management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball dispensing management device are connected, for example, by an internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes the degree of benefit given to the player, such as the difference in number of coins (net increase) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts (for example, how much the player gained (how much the gaming establishment lost) or how much the player lost (how much the gaming establishment gained), etc.), the continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these, etc.

Also, for example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for playing by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is desirable that the game value management device has the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game values to an external game value providing device, and also has the ability to prevent the number of recorded game values from being reduced except when the player directly operates it, and also has the ability to transmit the signal indicating the number of recorded game values only via a communication device.

The gaming value management device may have not only a function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also a function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the physical action of the player and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical action of the pachinko slot machine 1. In other words, it may be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachinko slot machine 1. In this way, the pachinko slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the medal-less gaming machine described above, so that the pachinko slot machine 1 can have a common configuration regardless of the specifications. In this case, the gaming value management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and hopper device 32 described above, or a method of indirectly controlling them by controlling them by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operation means and a return (settlement) operation means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operation means and a return operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as paper money, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Note that insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at a gaming establishment, but also member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. The gaming value recorded on a non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid from the next day onwards), but the gaming value recorded on a member recording medium is valid from the next day onwards.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described below. For example, first, the player deposits a valuable amount into the game value providing device by any method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable amount in response to the player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable amount to the pachislot machine 1. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game value is required. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates any of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the game value number to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium on which the transmitted game value number is recorded. The game value management device clears the game value number stored in itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange office or the like to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 1 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to the other pachislot machine 1. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation, but it may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, it may be possible to divide the game value held by the player. Also, the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and discharges it, but it may transmit information of a similar value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, etc., and may also discharge, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

In addition, if the pachislot machine 1 is not properly connected to the game value providing device (communication-only unit), and information corresponding to the number of game values is sent to the communication-only unit in response to the player's return operation, there is a risk that the information will be lost. Therefore, when the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) is not properly connected to the communication-only unit, it may be possible to control the machine to enter an error state when play begins, for example, and to prevent play from progressing in this error state by making it impossible to play (for example, a state in which betting operations, return operations, start operations, etc. cannot be accepted). This makes it possible to prevent information corresponding to the number of game values from being lost.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be provided with a lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between them is disabled in response to an operation on this lock operation means. In this case, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the result of the authentication process is normal.

The medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, does not require some external structures such as the medal insertion port 5 and medal payout port 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32, so not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but the power consumption of the gaming machine can also be reduced. In addition, it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, so fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, because the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medal-less gaming machine)
Next, a configuration example of the pachislot machine 1 configured as a medal-less gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medal-less gaming machine. Note that, hereinafter, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal count control board is connected to the main control board 71, and manages the number of medals (game value number) owned by the player. The medal count control board is also connected to a communication-only unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). The medal count control board also transmits ball output management information to the ball output management device via the connection terminal board and the communication-only unit. The medal count control board is also equipped with a medal count control circuit (not shown). The medal count control circuit is also composed of, for example, a medal count control CPU (not shown), a medal count control ROM (not shown), and a medal count control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for managing ball output managed by an association (information center) to which the gaming machine manufacturer belongs, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device, which is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling characteristics of each gaming machine are appropriate (ball output performance).

From this perspective, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, perform important functions in the slot machine 1, and therefore must be provided inside the slot machine 1 in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 show examples of such a manner.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing sticker, or affixing a crimping sticker that records that the crimping has been cut, etc.).

Therefore, by housing the medal count control board and the connection terminal board inside the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal count control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the above-mentioned configuration example 1. Note that the medal count control board case is configured as a resin case that is transparent (or nearly transparent) like the main control board case, and the medal count control board and the connection terminal board housed therein are housed in a state where they can be easily seen.

Here, the medal count control board case of configuration example 2 can be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or can be configured to undergo at least a portion of the sealing process. For example, the medal count control board case can be configured to be sealed by crimping like the main control board case, but no sealing sticker is affixed. Also, for example, the main control board case may be required to use a predetermined crimp sticker, but the medal count control board case may be configured to allow the use of any sticker as the crimp sticker.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball management device. That is, it shows an example of ball management information that the medal count control board transmits to the ball management device via the connection terminal board and the communication unit. Note that this is only an example, and it is possible to configure the device so that some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or to transmit information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34.

The timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may also be arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device may also be arbitrary. As long as the ball payout management device is capable of monitoring the ball payout performance of each gaming machine at least for each unit (e.g., each business day of an amusement facility), the information may be transmitted at any timing. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may differ depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation, excluding those bets made by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of paid out coins" is the cumulative number of paid out coins per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values granted by the payout process of the gaming machine, excluding those granted by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference in number of coins that occurred during one unit after each gaming machine was powered on (in other words, the difference in number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most during one unit. This is referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal count control board calculates such a maximum difference in number of coins and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes for business), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts from game devices" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and is also the cumulative number of payouts while the various game devices are in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game value awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the various game devices are in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the various game devices are in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the closing time of the gaming establishment).

The accumulated data "total number of consecutive feature payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on, and is also the cumulative number of payouts paid out while the consecutive feature (RB, including RB when BB is in operation) is in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game value awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the consecutive feature is in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the consecutive feature is in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the gaming establishment).

The medal count control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). The accumulated data "role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous role ratio information, the accumulated data "favorable zone ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information, the accumulated data "instruction-included role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the AT state, and the accumulated data "role, etc. state ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the operation of various roles.

The accumulated data "number of plays" is the cumulative number of plays per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of plays played to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPU ID", hereafter referred to as the "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball management device, it transmits information including the transmitted individual identification number.

The stored data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball output management device, it transmits information including the transmitted manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball management device, it transmits information including the transmitted product code.

The stored data "medal count control chip ID number" is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball management device, it transmits information including the transmitted individual identification number. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is transmitted to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, the relevant information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including the manufacturer code that was sent. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal count control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the transmitted product code. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball dispensing management device is capable of storing various information (ball dispensing management information) transmitted from gaming machines. The ball dispensing management information also includes multiple individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal count control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball dispensing management device can identify the gaming machine that sent the information by these individual identification information, and if, for example, the correspondence between the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal count control chip ID number" changes from a certain point in time, it can recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (i.e., the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modification has occurred).

The ball output management information also includes multiple pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of coins inserted" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can use these pieces of ball output information to determine whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine that sent the information is within an appropriate range. For example, if the "total number of coins paid out" or the "ratio of instructed features" suddenly becomes significantly high, it can determine whether fraud or tampering has occurred, or whether there was some kind of flaw in the original design specifications.

If the ball output management device recognizes the above-mentioned possibility, it is expected that the result will be notified to the gaming facility or gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, by constructing a management system that includes multiple managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication-only unit) that transmits ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of each managed gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to manage the number of game values owned by a player. Therefore, in order to allow the manager of the gaming facility to grasp such management status or other information, a medal count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the medal count control board.

The medal count monitor device is, for example, configured with a four-digit seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal count control board case. The medal count monitor device sequentially displays various information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball payout management information) related to the game value number tallied and calculated by the medal count control CPU (or it may be the main CPU 101). Note that if the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54 are all displayed by the medal count monitor device, the role ratio monitor device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board (e.g., a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the medal count monitor device or for switching its contents may be provided within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may display the type of error state that has occurred when any of the various error states related to the device occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, if a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, if a communication error occurs with the gaming value providing device, or if an abnormality occurs in the medal count control RWM, a numerical value corresponding to the error may be displayed. In this case, an explanation section (such as a sticker or printing) indicating the correspondence may be provided on or near the medal count control board case so that the manager of the gaming facility can easily recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to transmit ball management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided as a means for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of parts, but also reduces the amount of wiring to the outside, thereby improving security.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged in close proximity at least inside the cabinet G. This can improve the efficiency of the connection process. Also, the length of the wiring can be kept constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, improving security.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit ball-discharge management information to the ball-discharge management device. The ball-discharge management device can appropriately manage the ball-discharge performance of each medalless gaming machine by the transmitted ball-discharge management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball-discharge performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the device may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

In addition, the medal count control board may be provided with a function for appropriately managing the ball output performance, and on the assumption that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, it may not have the function for forcibly ending the advantageous zone based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above or a different RWM). The ball output monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but is not initialized when the favorable zone ends, so as to monitor the ball output. When the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the favorable zone itself is not forcibly ended, but the control may be performed to reduce the ball output performance by lowering the probability of navigation occurrence, lowering the probability that the AT state is extended, or ending the AT state itself. In this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball output performance. In this case, such control results may be transmitted to the ball output management device as ball output management information. In other words, the ball output performance of each medal-less gaming machine may be managed in both the medal count control board and the ball output management device.

(Example of the main control board configuration of a pachinko slot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, hereinafter, a configuration example of the reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71 in the pachislot machine 1, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. The manufacturer's name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that produces the pachislot machine 1, and the control number is a number that identifies the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board management number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the past. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, a slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, if model A is removed from the game center and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model B"), AA Co., Ltd. must erase the manufacturer name and board management number printed in the lower row by laser engraving and newly print the manufacturing number and board management number related to its own company in a different space (for example, the manufacturer name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board management number "AA-00-11-22" in the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35).

Then, if model B is subsequently removed from the gaming establishment, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. were to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"), BB Co., Ltd. would have to remove the manufacturer's name and board control number printed on the top line by laser engraving, and print a new manufacturing number and board control number related to their company in a different space. However, since there is no more free space in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is a problem in that, even though the hardware is still fully reusable, the main control board 71 may not be able to be reused due to the constraints mentioned above.

This is also true in cases where multiple manufacturer names and board control numbers have been printed on the machine from the beginning. For example, even if the serial numbers and board control numbers for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed on the machine in advance, the serial numbers and board control numbers for AA Co., Ltd. are erased by laser engraving when Model A is manufactured. Therefore, while BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the machine, AA Co., Ltd. will not be able to reuse it. In contrast, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 are expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. In other words, it is possible to increase the reusability of boards used to control games, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35 shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of the code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) or other code can be used. In other words, the code may be any code as long as it includes information that allows a checker to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.).

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when model A is assumed to have been manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can erase the third code from the right by laser engraving and print the fourth code from the right, so that the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of AA Co., Ltd., thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

In other words, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, it is possible to save the printing space for each manufacturer's name and board control number on the surface of the main control board 71, making it possible to increase reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a board management number is printed, similarly to configuration example 2 described above. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, multiple codes (for example, four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes are printed for each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the parts corresponding to each code are crimped with, for example, a strip-shaped member, etc., so that the codes can be fixed in an unreadable state. In addition, for example, by cutting the strip-shaped member, etc., the fixation can be released to make the codes readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is made readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right is made readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right is made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can make only the fourth code from the right readable and the first through third codes from the right unreadable, thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even new pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since at least one code needs to be made readable and the other codes need to be made unreadable, further reuse is possible, and it is also possible for the machine to be reused by more gaming machine manufacturers. Note that configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 can also be configured so that only crimping holes are provided, and a code is printed in the location corresponding to the crimping hole each time the machine is reused.

[10. Alternative examples of main control board]
Next, with reference to Figures 36 to 59, other examples (other configuration examples, modified examples, and extended examples) of the main control board of a pachinko slot machine will be described. Note that, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as other examples of the main control board in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to what is described as other gaming machines (other configuration examples) in this embodiment, and further, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines (other configuration examples) in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to what is described as other examples of the main control board in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be the invention according to this embodiment.

[10-1. Pachislot machine equipped with main control board according to another example]
First, a slot machine (in this example, a slot machine 401) equipped with a main control board according to another example will be described with reference to Figs. 36 and 37. Fig. 36 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 401 equipped with the main control board 411, and Fig. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game information display unit 437, the medal number display unit 441, and the medal loan display unit 442 provided in the slot machine 401 equipped with the main control board 411. In this example, the slot machine 401 equipped with the main control board 411 according to another example is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, but this is merely an example, and the inventions described in this example that do not require this configuration can naturally be applied to a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that uses physical gaming value for playing games.

The pachislot machine 401 is configured to be able to execute games by having various components shown in FIG. 36. The pachislot machine 401, together with the game medium lending device 402 and peripheral devices 403 such as a data display, constitutes a gaming system capable of executing various operations related to games. Although not shown in the figure, the game medium lending device 402 and peripheral devices 403 such as a data display are connected to the gaming facility's management computer (hall computer) by, for example, a LAN line, and are configured to be able to transmit data to the management computer. The game medium lending device 402 also has the same functions as the above-mentioned game value providing device (communication-only unit).

The slot machine 401 has a main control board 411, a sub-control board 412, a door relay board 413, and a sub-relay board 414. The main control board 411 and the door relay board 413, the door relay board 413 and the sub-relay board 414, and the sub-relay board 414 and the sub-control board 412 are electrically connected to each other. In addition, the main control board 411 and the sub-control board 412 are electrically connected to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 411 to the sub-control board 412 via the door relay board 413 and the sub-relay board 414.

The main control board 411 has a main control unit 411a as a game control means (game control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 411b as a game value control means (game value control unit) that controls the management of the game value. The main control unit 411a has the same functions as the main control board 71 described above, and the medal count control unit 411b has the same functions as the game value management device (medal count control board) described above.

Here, in FIG. 36, the main control unit 411a and the medal count control unit 411b are mounted on the same main control board 411, but they may be mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards) and electrically connected to each other so that they perform the same functions.

The sub-control board 412 is a performance control board that controls the performance, and has the same functions as the sub-control board 72 described above. The door relay board 413 has the same functions as the main relay board 73 described above. The sub-relay board 414 has the same functions as the sub-relay board 74 described above.

The slot machine 401 also has a power supply unit 415 that includes a power supply board 415a and a power switch 415b. The power supply unit 415 has the same functions as the power supply device 34 described above.

The slot machine 401 also has a reel unit 421, a reset switch 422, a setting key switch 423, and a settlement switch 424, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 411a. These may also be connected to the main control unit 411a via a door relay board 413. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 411b.

The reel unit 421 has the same functions as the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (and the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R) described above. The reset switch 422 has the same functions as the reset switch 53 described above. The setting key switch 423 has the same functions as the setting key switch 52 described above. The settlement switch 424 has the same functions as the settlement switch 9S described above.

However, since the pachislot machine 401 in this example is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, when the settlement switch 424 detects that the corresponding settlement button (not shown) has been pressed, the number of credited medals is transmitted to the gaming medium lending device 402 (described later) via the gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 443 (described later) (credit settlement is performed).

The pachislot machine 401 also has a start switch 431, a return switch 432, a 1BET switch 433, a MAXBET switch 434, a stop switch board 435, a door open/close switch 436, and a game information display unit 437, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 411a via the door relay board 413. Note that these may also be connected directly to the main control unit 411a without going through the door relay board 413. Also, as long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 411b.

The start switch 431 has the same function as the start switch 7S described above. The 1 BET switch 433 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the 1 BET button 6b described above is pressed. The MAX BET switch 434 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the MAX BET button 6a described above is pressed. The stop switch board 435 has the same function as the stop switch 8S described above. The door opening/closing switch 436 has the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 described above.

The return switch 432 and the corresponding return button (not shown) are configured as a return operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's return operation, and when the return switch 432 detects that the corresponding return button has been pressed, the number of medals bet is returned as credits (bet settlement is performed). The game information display unit 437 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

The pachislot machine 401 also has a medal count display unit 441, a medal lending display unit 442 including a medal lending operation board 442a, a lending switch 442b and a return switch 442c, a game ball etc. connection terminal board 443, and a medal count clear switch 444, all of which are electrically connected to the medal count control unit 411b. These may also be connected to the medal count control unit 411b via a door relay board 413. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the main control unit 411a. The medal count display unit 441 and the medal lending display unit 442 will be explained later with reference to FIG. 37.

The game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 has the same functions as the external centralized terminal board 55 described above, and also has the same functions as the communication device (connection terminal board) described above. The game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 is equipped with a connection mechanism (not shown) for connecting the game medium lending device 402 to the medal count control unit 411b, and for connecting the data display device or other peripheral device 403 to the medal lending operation board 442a, and the connection mechanism 445a is provided with a connector (e.g., a 25-pin connection connector) composed of multiple connection pins that is connected to the game medium lending device 402 via a harness.

The medal count clear switch 444 is a switch that can detect an initialization operation (e.g., a pressing operation) when an administrator of the gaming facility clears (initializes) the medal count credited in the slot machine 401. When the medal count clear switch 444 is pressed, a detection signal (medal count clear signal) is output to the medal count control unit 411b. In this case, the medal count control unit 411b controls the medal count display unit 441 based on the medal count clear signal so that the display of a 5-digit 7-segment LED (see FIG. 37B) for credit display provided in the medal count display unit 441 described below becomes "00000" (number of credits = 0). An implementation example of the medal count clear switch 444 will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

The slot machine 401 also has a display device 451, which is electrically connected to the sub-control board 412. The display device 451 may also be connected to the sub-control board 412 via the sub-relay board 414. Here, the display device 451 has the same functions as the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 described above.

The slot machine 401 also has a speaker group 452, an LED drive board 453, a performance switch 454, and an operation switch 455, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board 412 via the sub-relay board 414. Note that these may also be connected directly to the sub-control board 412 without going through the sub-relay board 414.

The speaker group 452 has the same functions as the speaker groups 35a, 35b, etc. described above. The LED drive board 453 is a board on which the drive circuits for each LED board 456 are mounted, and each LED board 456 has the same functions as the lamp/LED group 23, etc. described above. The performance switch 454 and the operation switch 455 have the same functions as the performance button groups 10a, 10b, etc. described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 37A, an example of the configuration of the game information display unit 437 will be described. The game information display unit 437 is configured to be able to display various game information, and its display operation is controlled by a main control microprocessor 470 (main control circuit) described below in the main control unit 411a. The game information display unit 437 can be installed in any position as long as it is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachinko slot machine 1 (in FIG. 1, the position where the medal insertion slot 5 and the performance button 10a are provided, or in the vicinity thereof).

As shown in FIG. 37A, the gaming information display unit 437 is provided with a payout display section for displaying information on the number of gaming media paid out (the number of gaming values awarded). The payout display section is composed of a two-digit seven-segment LED ("Payout Display" in FIG. 37A) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

In addition, the game information display unit 437 is provided with LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "line LEDs") for displaying the number of bets, indicated as "START", "REPLAY", "1 BET", "2 BET", and "3 BET" in FIG. 37A, as lamps that indicate game operation information.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (number of inserted coins) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the 1 bet button 6b lights up the "1 BET" line LED, pressing the 1 bet button 6b again lights up the "1 BET" and "2 BET" line LEDs, pressing the 1 bet button 6b again lights up all the "1 BET" to "3 BET" line LEDs and lights up the "START" line LED. At this time, each time the 1 bet button 6b is pressed, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 441 described below is decremented by 1.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (number of inserted balls) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the MAX BET button 6a causes all of the line LEDs for "1 BET" to "3 BET" to light up, as well as the "START" line LED. At this time, with one bet operation, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 441 (described below) is reduced by 3.

Furthermore, for example, if a replay role is won in the previous game, the "START" and "REPLAY" line LEDs will light up. At this time, the value of the number of game media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 441 (described below) will not be subtracted.

In addition, the game information display unit 437 is provided with an instruction display section for displaying information on the stop operation to be notified to the player in a situation where information on the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, in an AT state). The instruction display section is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED (indicated as "instruction display" in FIG. 37A) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. Note that, like the instruction monitor (notification lamp) described above, the instruction display section may display information that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified (for example, displaying "1" when notifying the push order of "left → center → right"), or may directly display the information on the stop operation to be notified (for example, displaying "123" when notifying the push order of "left → center → right").

Next, referring to FIG. 37B, an example of the configuration of the medal count display unit 441 will be described. The medal count display unit 441 is configured to be able to display information on the number of game media stored inside the slot machine 401 (the number of game values held), and the display operation is controlled by a medal count control microprocessor 480 (game value control circuit) described later in the medal count control unit 411b. The medal count display unit 441 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the slot machine 1 (in FIG. 1, the medal insertion slot 5 and the performance button 10a are provided, or in the vicinity thereof). The medal count display unit 441 also has the same functions as the above-mentioned held game value number display device.

As shown in FIG. 37B, the medal count display unit 441 is provided with a credit display section for displaying information on the number of game media stored (the number of game values held). The credit display section is composed of a 5-digit 7-segment LED ("credit display" in FIG. 37B) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. Note that, for example, if a similar credit display is performed in the game media lending device 402, the pachinko slot machine 401 may not be provided with a credit display section, or, as in the case of a conventional pachinko slot machine 1, a credit display may be performed with a predetermined number (for example, 50) as the upper limit.

The medal count display unit 441 is also provided with an error display section for displaying information about errors related to the control of the medal count (number of credits) managed by the medal count control section 411b. The error display section is composed of a one-digit seven-segment LED ("error display" in FIG. 37B) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. When an error occurs related to the control of the medal count (number of credits) managed by the medal count control section 411b, an error code (letters, numbers, etc.) corresponding to the type of error is displayed by this one-digit seven-segment LED for error display. Since the error display section serves as an error display means exclusively for the management control of the medal count (game value), for example, there is no confusion between errors related to the management control of the medal count and other errors, and it is easy to recognize that an error has occurred related to the management control of the medal count.

Here, examples of errors related to the control of the number of medals (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 411b include upper limit exceeding errors. An upper limit exceeding error is an error that occurs when an upper limit (for example, "16369") is set in a credit counter for counting the number of stored gaming media provided in the medal count control unit 411b, and it is determined that adding the number of payouts to the credit counter would exceed that upper limit. Note that if an upper limit exceeding error occurs, it can be resolved (released) by performing a credit settlement.

Next, referring to FIG. 37C, an example of the configuration of the medal lending display unit 442 will be described. The medal lending display unit 442 is configured to be able to display information on the number of game media (game value) remaining on the game card (not shown) inserted in the game media lending device 402 (this is referred to as "degrees"), and the display operation is controlled by a medal count control microprocessor 480 (game value control circuit) described later in the medal count control unit 411b. The medal lending display unit 442 can be installed in any position as long as it is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base part of the front door of the pachinko slot machine 1 (in FIG. 1, the position where the medal insertion slot 5 and the performance button 10a are provided, or in the vicinity thereof). The degree may also include the number of game media (game value) that can be lent according to the amount of money inserted into the game media lending device 402.

As shown in FIG. 37C, the medal lending display unit 442 is provided with a degree display section for displaying information on the remaining degree. The degree display section is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED ("degree display" in FIG. 37C) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

The medal lending display unit 442 is also provided with a lending lamp marked "Lending" in FIG. 37C, which indicates whether the gaming medium can be lent or not. The lending lamp is lit when the gaming medium can be lent (before the lending operation) and is turned off when the gaming medium cannot be lent (during lending, settlement, return, or an error has occurred). The lending lamp is also configured to function as a lending button that can be pressed, and pressing this button (i.e., the lending operation) is detected by the lending switch 442b.

If the lending lamp is on when a lending operation is detected (i.e., if a lending operation is possible), a predetermined number of gaming media is added to the number of credits managed by the pachislot machine 401 from the number of points managed by the gaming medium lending device 402. In addition, the number of points remaining after subtracting the number of points corresponding to the predetermined number of gaming media is displayed on the point display unit. Note that in this example, the lending lamp is configured to also function as a lending button, but the lending button may be provided separately from the lending lamp, and the lending lamp may be configured to only perform the display function.

The medal lending display unit 442 is also provided with a return lamp marked "return" in FIG. 37C, which indicates whether the game medium can be returned or not. The return lamp is lit when the game medium can be returned (before the return operation) and is turned off when the game medium cannot be returned (during lending, settlement, return, or an error has occurred). The return lamp is also configured to function as a return button that can be pressed, and this pressing (i.e., return operation) is detected by the return switch 442c.

If the return lamp is on when a return operation is detected (i.e., if a return operation is possible), the number of credits or bets managed by the slot machine 401 is added to the number of points managed by the gaming media lending device 402, and then the gaming card with that number stored (including cases where the gaming card does not store the number of points itself, but stores information associated with it) is ejected from the gaming media lending device 402. Note that in this example, the return lamp is configured to also function as a return button, but the return button may be provided separately from the return lamp, and the return lamp may be configured to only perform the display function.

In this example, dynamic lighting control is used as the control method for the various 7-segment LEDs provided in the game information display unit 437, medal count display unit 441, and medal lending display unit 442, but a different control method (e.g., static lighting control) may also be used.

[10-2. Configuration example of main control unit and medal count control unit of main control board according to another example]
Next, configuration examples of the main control unit and medal count control unit of the main control board according to another embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 38 to Fig. 40. Fig. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control board 411 and main control board case, Fig. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control unit 411a and medal count control unit 411b of the main control board 411, and Fig. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control microprocessor 470 and medal count control microprocessor 480 of the main control board 411.

As described above and as shown in FIG. 38, the main control board 411 is equipped with a main control unit 411a and a medal count control unit 411b, and also has a medal count clear switch 444. Details of the main control unit 411a and the medal count control unit 411b will be described later. The main control board 411 is mounted inside the slot machine 401, for example, in the same manner as the above-mentioned main control board 71, housed in a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin board case (in this example, the main control board case 460).

Although not shown in the figures, the main control board case 460 has various sealing structures to prevent it from being easily opened, or to make it easier to identify if it is opened, in order to prevent tampering. In other words, the main control board case 460 is basically configured to make it difficult to access the main control board 411, while still ensuring visibility of the main control board 411.

In this example, since the medal count clear switch 444 is mounted on the main control board 411, it is necessary to enable access to the medal count clear switch 444 (operation of the medal count clear switch 444) while ensuring such safety (i.e., without the main control board case 460 being opened).

In this example, a small hole 461a is formed in the main control board case 460 at a position corresponding to the location of the medal count clear switch 444, so that the medal count clear switch 444 can be pressed from outside the main control board case 460. More specifically, a recess 461b is formed in the main control board case 460 at a position corresponding to the location of the medal count clear switch 444, and then a small hole 461a is formed approximately in the center of the recess 461b.

The size of the small hole 461a may be, for example, about 2 mm in diameter so that the medal count clear switch 444 cannot be easily operated by a human finger or the like. Then, a staff member of the gaming establishment may, for example, use a dedicated tool to press this. As described above, the medal count clear switch 444 is a switch used by the gaming establishment's administrator to clear (initialize) the medal count credited in the slot machine 401, and is therefore not used under normal circumstances. It is provided for use when an unexpected state occurs in the medal count control (control related to payout, etc.) related to the management of the number of accumulated game media (number of credits). Therefore, this configuration is unlikely to cause problems, and it is also possible to prevent the medal count clear switch 444 from being pressed accidentally.

From this perspective, for example, the shape of the recess 461a may be a unique shape that matches the shape of a dedicated tool, so as to further prevent erroneous operation. For example, a protrusion or the like may be provided on at least a part of the recess 461a, so that if it is just a thin rod-shaped object, this will obstruct access to the medal count clear switch 444, making it difficult to access, but if it is a dedicated tool, this will be avoided and the medal count clear switch 444 can be accessed. Note that this is merely one example, and such unique shapes are not limited to this.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, an example of the configuration of the main control unit 411a will be described. The main control unit 411a has a main control microprocessor 470 (game control circuit), a clock pulse generating circuit 471, and a power management circuit 472. Details of the main control microprocessor 470 will be described later.

The clock pulse generating circuit 471 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, which will be described later, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to a clock circuit 505 (EX) in the main control microprocessor 470, which will be described later. The main control microprocessor 470 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 472 manages fluctuations in the 12V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 415a (see FIG. 36) and supplies 5V DC (VCC) power to the main control microprocessor 470. When the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the startup voltage value (10V) from 0V), the power management circuit 472 outputs a reset signal to a reset controller 506 (XSRST) in the main control microprocessor 470 (described later), and when a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12V to below the power interruption voltage value (10.5V)), it outputs a power interruption detection signal to a parallel input port 511 (XINT) in the main control microprocessor 470 (described later). That is, the power management circuit 472 also functions as a means (startup means) for outputting a reset signal (startup signal) to the main control microprocessor 470 when power is turned on, and as a means (power failure means) for outputting a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the main control microprocessor 470 when a power failure occurs.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, an example of the configuration of the medal count control unit 411b will be described. The medal count control unit 411b has a medal count control microprocessor 480 (game value control circuit), a clock pulse generation circuit 481, a power supply management circuit 482, and a role ratio monitor 483. Details of the medal count control microprocessor 480 will be described later.

In addition, as is clear from a comparison of the main control unit 411a and the medal count control unit 411b in FIG. 39, the medal count control unit 411b is configured by adding a role ratio monitor 483 to the main control unit 411a, and the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generating circuit 481 and the power management circuit 482 provided in the medal count control unit 411b are similar to the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generating circuit 471 and the power management circuit 472 provided in the main control unit 411a, respectively. Therefore, a description of the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generating circuit 481 and the power management circuit 482 will be omitted here.

In this example, the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 are gaming machine-specific microprocessors designed and manufactured by the same semiconductor manufacturer, and as described above, the clock pulse generating circuits (471, 481) and power management circuits (472, 482) have the same configurations and functions. Therefore, when the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 are mounted on the same control board (main control board 411) as in this example, instead of providing individual corresponding clock pulse generating circuits and power management circuits, one clock pulse generating circuit and power management circuit may be shared by the two microprocessors.

That is, the clock pulse generating circuit 471 and the clock pulse generating circuit 481 can be configured as one and the same clock pulse generating circuit. Also, the power supply management circuit 472 and the power supply management circuit 482 can be configured as one and the same power supply management circuit. Note that it is also possible to configure the circuits so that the clock pulse generating circuit is shared but the power supply management circuits are provided individually, or to configure the power supply management circuit is shared but the clock pulse generating circuits are provided individually.

The role ratio monitor 483 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and has the same functions as the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54. In this example, the role ratio monitor 483 is provided inside the main control board case 460, similar to the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54, but differs from the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54 in that it is mounted on the main control board 411 as one component of the medal count control unit 411b, and its display contents (various ratio information) are controlled by the medal count control microprocessor 480. However, it may also be mounted on the main control board 411 as one component of the main control unit 411a, and its display contents (various ratio information) may be controlled by the main control microprocessor 470.

The display contents (various ratio information) are controlled by the medal count control microprocessor 480, which is provided inside the main control board case 460, but may be configured to be mounted on another board (e.g., a ratio display board) connected to the medal count control unit 411b, or such a display unit may be provided separately and connected to the medal count control unit 411b. Either mode may be adopted as long as visibility of the role ratio monitor 483 can be ensured when the main control board 411 is housed in the main control board case 460 and installed inside the slot machine 401.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, an example of the configuration of the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 will be described. Both the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 are microprocessors with security functions for gaming machines, and in this example, the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 have the same configuration (although they may of course have different configurations).

Therefore, here, the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 will be simply referred to as "microprocessor MP" for explanation. Note that for components with different functions between the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480, the differences will be explained as appropriate.

The microprocessor MP has a CPU 501, a ROM 502, a RAM 503, an external bus interface 504 (signal bus 516 (local bus)), a clock circuit 505, a reset controller 506, an arithmetic circuit 507, a matching block 508, unique information 509, a random number circuit 510 (random number generating circuit), a parallel input port 511, an interrupt controller 512, a timer circuit 513, a serial communication circuit 514, and a parallel output port 515. The components other than the signal bus 516 constituting the microprocessor MP are connected to each other via the signal bus 516. Note that terminals D0 to D7 of IC1 and terminals D0 to D7 of IC2 described below are terminals for the external bus interface 504 (see FIG. 41 described below, etc.).

The CPU 501 executes various control programs and performs various controls based on the clock pulses generated by the clock circuit 505. In the main control microprocessor 470, the CPU 501 (hereinafter also referred to as the "main CPU") executes various control programs and performs control related to the overall gaming operation. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 480, the CPU 501 (hereinafter also referred to as the "medal count control CPU") executes various control programs and mainly performs control related to the counting operation of gaming media (gaming value) at the time of payout and settlement.

The ROM 502 stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501, various data tables, etc. The storage capacity of the ROM 502 is 12 kilobytes. In the main control microprocessor 470, the ROM 502 (hereinafter also referred to as the "main ROM") stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 501, various data tables, data for sending various control commands to the sub-control board 412, etc. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 480, the ROM 502 (hereinafter also referred to as the "medal count control ROM") stores various control programs executed by the medal count control CPU 501, various data required for input/output operations of signals and data between the main control unit 411a and the game ball connection terminal board 443 (game medium lending device 402, peripheral devices such as data display device 403), etc.

The RAM 503 is provided with various storage areas in which various data (parameters, flags, etc.) used when the CPU 501 executes various control programs are stored. The RAM 503 has a storage capacity of 1 kilobyte. In the main control microprocessor 470, the RAM 503 (hereinafter also referred to as the "main RAM") is provided with a storage area in which various data such as internal lottery winning combinations determined by execution of the control programs are stored. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 480, the RAM 503 (hereinafter also referred to as the "medal count control RAM") is provided with a storage area in which various counters (e.g. medal counter, insertion counter, etc.) and various flags used when executing payout control, etc. are stored.

The external bus interface 504 is an interface circuit for electrically connecting the microprocessor MP to an external signal bus to which various components provided outside the microprocessor MP are connected. An example of the connection configuration in the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

The clock circuit 505 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and converts the clock pulse signals input from the clock pulse generating circuits 471, 481 into clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies used for CPU operation and other components (for example, timer circuit 513). The clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies generated by the clock circuit 505 are output to all circuits (CPU 501 to external bus interface 504 and reset controller 506 to parallel output port 515) in the microprocessor MP except for the clock circuit 505, at frequencies according to the operation of each circuit.

The reset controller 506 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signals input from the power management circuits 472 and 482. The arithmetic circuit 507 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. When an inspection device is connected, the comparison block 508 checks the signal level to see if the connected inspection device is genuine.

Unique information 509 stores unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor MP. The chip individual number of the microprocessor MP is composed of 4 bytes of data, and is set when the chip is manufactured. In addition, the chip individual number of the microprocessor MP is set to a different number for each chip.

In the main control microprocessor 470, the unique information (identification information) of the main control microprocessor 470 is stored in unique information 509. The ROM code of the main ROM 502 and the individual chip number of the main control microprocessor 470 are also stored in unique information 509. The ROM code of the main ROM 502 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, that is, 16 bytes of data. Each of the 4 bytes of data that make up the ROM code of the main ROM 502 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "2FBFh" of the built-in ROM (main ROM 502), and the method of generating the 4 bytes of data also differs for each 4 bytes of data.

Meanwhile, in the medal count control microprocessor 480, the medal count control microprocessor 480's unique information (identification information) is stored in the unique information 509. Also, the ROM code of the medal count control ROM 502 and the individual chip number of the medal count control microprocessor 480 are stored in the unique information 509. The ROM code of the medal count control ROM 502 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, that is, 16 bytes of data. Each of the 4 bytes of data that make up the ROM code of the medal count control ROM 502 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "0FBFh" of the built-in ROM (medal count control ROM 502), and the method of generating the 4 bytes of data also differs for each 4 bytes of data.

The random number circuit 510 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The random number circuit 510 is composed of multiple random number registers, and can be composed of, for example, random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. In the main control microprocessor 470, the main CPU 501 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 510 as, for example, a random number value for an internal lottery.

The parallel input port 511 is an input port (memory map I/O) for signals input to the microprocessor MP from various circuits (e.g., power management circuits 472, 482, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor MP. The parallel input port 511 is also connected to the random number circuit 510 and the interrupt controller 512. In the main control microprocessor 470, the start switch 431 is connected to the parallel input port 511, and when the start switch 431 is turned on (on edge), a latch signal is output from the parallel input port 511 to a specified random number register (e.g., random number register 0) of the random number circuit 510. In the random number circuit 510, the specified random number register is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is obtained.

The interrupt controller 512 controls the timing of execution of interrupt processing by the CPU 501 based on a reset signal or a power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuits 472 and 482 via the parallel input port 511, or a timeout signal input at a predetermined interval from the timer circuit 513. When a reset signal or a power interruption detection signal is input from the power management circuits 472 and 482, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 513, the interrupt controller 512 outputs an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the CPU 501. Then, the CPU 501 performs various interrupt processing based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 512.

Specifically, in the main control microprocessor 470, the interrupt controller 512 controls the execution timing of the interrupt process by the main CPU 501 (for example, the periodic interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 in the case of a timeout signal) based on the reset signal, power interruption detection signal, or timeout signal input from the power management circuit 472 via the parallel input port 511 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec from the timer circuit 513. Then, the main CPU 501 performs various processes in the periodic interrupt process (for example, see FIG. 32) based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 512 in response to the timeout signal from the timer circuit 513. The interrupt process by the main CPU 501 executed based on the reset signal corresponds to the main process shown in FIG. 23. That is, in all processes executed by the main CPU 501, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 512 is the starting point for each process.

On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 480, the interrupt controller 512 controls the execution timing of the interrupt process by the medal count control CPU 501 based on the reset signal, power interruption detection signal, or timeout signal input from the power management circuit 482 via the parallel input port 511, or the 1 msec cycle timeout signal input from the timer circuit 513. Similarly to the above, the medal count control CPU 501 performs various processes such as port input process, game information reception process, data transmission process to the main control unit 411a, data transmission process to peripheral devices, data reception process from peripheral devices, and port output process based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 512 in response to the reset signal, power interruption detection signal, or timeout signal. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 512 is the starting point for all processes performed by the medal count control CPU 501.

The timer circuit 513 (PTC) operates (counts the elapsed time) with the clock pulse signal (a clock pulse signal with a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)) generated by the clock circuit 505. The timer circuit 513 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 512 at a predetermined period (a period of 1.1172 msec for the main control microprocessor 470, and a period of 1 msec for the medal count control microprocessor 480).

The serial communication circuit 514 is a communication circuit that controls the serial communication of various data between the control board on which the communication circuit is implemented and various boards provided outside the control board. In the main control microprocessor 470, the serial communication circuit 514 serially communicates data (various control commands, various data, etc.) between the main control unit 411a and various boards (e.g., the sub-control board 412, etc.) provided outside the main control board 411. The serial communication circuit 514 is composed of four communication circuits SCU0 to SCU3, with only the communication circuit SCU0 being composed of a bidirectional serial communication circuit, and the communication circuits SCU1 to SCU3 being composed of serial communication circuits dedicated to transmission. For example, when connecting the main control board 411 (main control unit 411a) and the sub-control board 412 by serial communication, the communication circuit SCU1, which is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used, and when connecting the main control unit 411a and the medal count control unit 411b by serial communication, the communication circuit SCU0, which is a bidirectional serial communication circuit, is used. This is a method of using serial communication circuits that was established to prevent fraudulent activities.

The parallel output port 515 is an output port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals output from the microprocessor MP to various circuits provided externally. In this example, data is output using a FIFO (First In First Out) method, for example.

[10-3. Circuit configuration example of main control board according to another example]
Next, an example of the circuit configuration of a main control board according to another embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 41 to Fig. 49. Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 411, Fig. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an IC that can be mounted on the main control board 411, Figs. 43 to 45 are diagrams for explaining an example of the configuration of the circuit pattern of the main control board 411, Figs. 46 and 47 are diagrams for explaining an example of the configuration of electronic components that cannot be used on the main control board 411, and Figs. 48 and 49 are diagrams for explaining an example of the configuration of DIP components that can be mounted on the main control board 411.

The control board used in the gaming machine is generally configured as a printed circuit board (PCB), and in this example, the main control board 411 is also configured as a printed circuit board. For example, in the case of a double-sided board, a copper-clad laminate with copper foil attached to both sides of the board body (insulating board) configured as an insulator is processed using glass fiber or resin, and then cut to the required size, through holes and VIA holes are formed to be electrically conductive, the copper foil of the parts to be left as the required wiring pattern (circuit pattern) is masked, the copper foil other than the masked parts is removed to form the wiring pattern, and the parts of the formed wiring pattern that need to be exposed (such as parts to be soldered later) are covered with an insulating solder resist made of an ink material or a film material (protected by laminating insulating layers). Then, a number of required electronic components are mounted on the board manufactured in this way to become a control board that performs a specific function.

The electronic components mounted on such control boards include surface mounted devices (SMD), which are mounted by soldering their terminals to the front side (one side) of the control board, and dip mounted devices (DIP), which have their terminals inserted into through holes from the front side (one side) of the control board and soldered to the back side (the other side) (or to both the front and back sides) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "dip components").

Surface mount components are smaller than equivalent dip mount components, and because they do not require through holes for mounting, they have the advantage of being able to save space on the mounting surface. Also, in recent years they have become more widely used than dip mount components, so they have the advantage of being easier to obtain and less expensive than equivalent dip mount components. On the other hand, because they are small, they are difficult to inspect using measuring instruments such as digital oscilloscopes, and they also have the disadvantage of being weaker after mounting than equivalent dip mount components.

On the other hand, dip-mounted components have the disadvantages of being more difficult to secure mounting space for than equivalent surface-mounted components, and being expensive and difficult to obtain. On the other hand, they have the advantages of being easier to handle than equivalent surface-mounted components, making the above-mentioned inspections easier to carry out, and being stronger after mounting.

In this example, certain conditions are set after taking into consideration such advantages and disadvantages, and if the conditions are met, surface mount components are used for the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 411, and if the conditions are not met, dip mount components are used for the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 411. In this section, an example circuit configuration of the main control board 411 will be explained focusing on this point.

(Outline of an example of a circuit configuration of the main control board 411)
First, referring to Fig. 41, an outline of an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 411 will be described. Note that Fig. 41 shows an outline of an example of a specific portion (the connection path between the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480) in the main control board 411, and does not show all the circuit configurations on the main control board 411. In other words, if the conditions described below are met, it is possible to adopt surface mount components in places other than those shown in Fig. 41 and provide test patterns (for example, test points 411k described below) in the connection paths between the surface mount components.

In FIG. 41, IC1 indicates the main control microprocessor 470 (see FIG. 40), and IC2 indicates the medal count control microprocessor 480 (see FIG. 40). Also, IC3 to IC6 are, for example, 20-pin ICs configured as buffer ICs, and are surface-mounted components. An example of the configuration of IC3 to IC6 will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 41, IC1 and IC3 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC3. That is, IC3 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the main control microprocessor 470. Also, IC1 and IC4 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC4. That is, IC4 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the main control microprocessor 470. This makes it possible to output data from IC3 or IC4 to the main control microprocessor 470.

The Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC3 and IC4 may be configured as, for example, D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) to allow data to be input and output between the main control microprocessor 470 and IC3 or IC4. Alternatively, data may be output from the main control microprocessor 470 to IC3 or IC4.

Here, a "data bus" is a signal bus that handles data (for data transfer). In other words, a "data bus" refers to a signal bus that handles the type of signal "data". Although not used in this embodiment, there is also a signal bus called an "address bus" that handles addresses (for address specification). In other words, an "address bus" refers to a signal bus that handles the type of signal "address". In contrast, a "local bus", as the word "local" suggests, refers to a signal bus with a relatively slow transfer speed among signal buses. Therefore, for example, a signal bus written as a "data bus" may be equivalent to a "local bus", and a signal bus written as a "local bus" may be equivalent to a "data bus", but there is no contradiction between these.

In addition, IC1 and IC3 are connected by a signal line between the XCS0 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1 and G2 terminals (gate input) of IC3. In addition, IC1 and IC4 are connected by a signal line between the XCS1 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1 and G2 terminals (gate input) of IC4. This makes it possible to switch on the IC1 side whether data is output from IC3 or IC4. The XCS0 and XCS1 terminals are output terminals from the parallel output port 515 (see Figure 40).

As shown in FIG. 41, IC2 and IC5 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5. That is, IC5 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the medal count control microprocessor 480. IC2 and IC6 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC6. That is, IC6 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the medal count control microprocessor 480. This enables data input/output between the medal count control microprocessor 480 and IC5 or IC6 (or data output from the medal count control microprocessor 480 to IC5 or IC6).

The D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5 and IC6 may be configured as, for example, Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output), allowing data to be output from IC5 or IC6 to the medal count control microprocessor 480.

In addition, the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 are connected to the input terminal (which may be an input/output terminal; not shown) of the role ratio monitor 483 by an external signal bus. In other words, the role ratio monitor 483 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the medal count control microprocessor 480.

IC2 and IC5 are also connected by a signal line between the XCS2 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC5. IC2 and IC6 are also connected by a signal line between the XCS3 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC6. This makes it possible to switch on the IC2 side whether data is output to IC5 or IC6. The XCS2 and XCS3 terminals are output terminals from the parallel output port 515 (see Figure 40).

In addition, IC3 and IC5 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5. This allows data to be output from IC5 to IC3. In other words, data output from IC2 is configured to be output to IC1 via IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are configured to be electrically connected in a manner in which IC3 and IC5 are mounted on the connection path.

In addition, IC4 and IC6 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6. This allows data to be output from IC6 to IC4. In other words, data output from IC2 is configured to be output to IC1 via IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are configured to be electrically connected in a manner in which IC4 and IC6 are mounted on the connection path.

Note that these are merely examples, and the connection between IC1 and IC2 is not limited to the above. For example, the positions of IC3 and IC5 may be swapped, and in a connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC3 and IC5 are implemented, data output from IC1 may be configured to be output to IC2 via IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). Also, for example, the positions of IC4 and IC6 may be swapped, and in a connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC4 and IC6 are implemented, data output from IC1 may be configured to be output to IC2 via IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output).

Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output), A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 may all be configured as input/output terminals (e.g., data buses), and the connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC3 and IC5 are implemented may be configured to allow mutual input/output of data.Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output), A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 may all be configured as input/output terminals (e.g., data buses), and the connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC4 and IC6 are implemented may be configured to allow mutual input/output of data.

Note that although reference numerals are omitted in FIG. 41, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 has eight test points (TP1 to TP8 described below) connected to the respective signal lines. Also, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 has eight test points (TP9 to TP16 described below) connected to the respective signal lines. This will be explained later with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG. 45.

(Examples of IC configurations that can be used as IC3 to IC6)
Next, referring to FIG. 42, an example of the configuration of an IC that can be used as IC3 to IC6 will be described. As described above, IC3 to IC6 are all 20-pin (having 20 terminals) ICs, and are electronic components configured as surface-mounted components. Note that the one shown in FIG. 42 is merely an example, and ICs that can be used in this example are not limited to this. For example, the number of pins (the number of terminals) may be less than 20 pins (e.g., a 10-pin IC) or more than 20 pins (e.g., a 64-pin IC). The same applies to other shapes (the shape of the main body and the positions where the pins are provided).

In addition, in this example, the surface of the main control board 411 on which the surface-mounted components are mounted (i.e., the front side which is easily visible from the outside when housed in the main control board case 460 and installed inside the slot machine 401) may be described as the component mounting surface, and the surface on which the surface-mounted components are not mounted (i.e., the back side which is difficult to see from the outside when housed in the main control board case 460 and installed inside the slot machine 401) may be described as the non-component mounting surface.

As shown in Figure 42, the IC in this example has a rectangular main body and foot-shaped terminals that protrude from the main body and are soldered to the solder surface (pads) on the main control board 411 when mounted. Ten terminals are provided on one side of the main body (the lower side in the top view of Figure 42) and ten on the opposite side (the upper side in the top view of Figure 42). In addition, in ICs like this, it is common for each terminal to be assigned a terminal number to define the role of each terminal and make it easier to understand. In the IC in this example, the lower terminals in the top view of Figure 42 are defined as terminals 1 to 10 from the lower left to the lower right, and the upper terminals in the top view of the same are defined as terminals 11 to 20 from the upper right to the upper left.

In IC3 to IC6, for example, terminal 10 is set to be used as a GND terminal, and terminal 20 is set to be used as a Vcc terminal. The remaining terminals are each set to be used as one of the terminals mentioned above.

For IC3 to IC6, any of the specifications (Type 1 to Type 3) shown in the size table in Figure 42 can be used. For example, Type 2 with a terminal pitch of 0.65 mm is used for IC3 and IC4, and Type 3 with a terminal pitch of 0.65 mm is used for IC5 and IC6.

In the size table in Figure 42, "D" represents the length of the IC body in the longitudinal direction, "E1" represents the length of the IC body in the lateral direction, and "E2" represents the overall length of the IC in the lateral direction of the IC body, taking into account the length of the terminals. Also, "P" represents the length from the center of one terminal to the center of the adjacent terminal (between terminals). This is called the "terminal pitch" and is also called the "inter-terminal pitch". Also, "B" represents the length of one terminal in the lateral direction.

In this example, from the perspective of ensuring the fairness and reliability of the game by allowing proper testing using measuring equipment such as a digital oscilloscope, the following conditions (constraints) are set when mounting surface-mounted components on the main control board 411.

(1) The surface area of all surface mount components must exceed a specified size. In essence, this condition stipulates that if surface mount components that are too small are mounted, proper inspection using measuring equipment cannot be performed, making it difficult to detect defects or fraudulent activities, and therefore such surface mount components must not be used.

In this example, the "predetermined size" is set to, for example, "6 mm square (6 mm2)." However, this is merely an example, and a larger size (for example, "8 mm square (8 mm2)") or a smaller size (for example, "4 mm square (4 mm2)") may be set. In other words, this is merely a size that is currently considered appropriate depending on the background circumstances of the gaming machine field and the specifications of the measuring device used (for example, the size of the probe of a digital oscilloscope), and can be changed as appropriate to suit changes in these factors.

In addition, the IC in this example meets the above condition because all of the specifications (Type 1 to Type 3) shown in the size table in Figure 42 have a surface area exceeding "6 square mm (6 mm2)."

(2) If the terminal pitch of each surface-mounted component connected by wiring is equal to or smaller than a specific size, a test pattern (for example, a test point, described below) connected to the wiring must be provided. In essence, this condition stipulates that if the terminals of a surface-mounted component or the space between the terminals becomes thinner than a certain condition (in other words, if it is expected that it will be difficult to access the terminals themselves or the wiring pattern between surface-mounted components with the probe of a measuring instrument), the use of such surface-mounted components is permitted, and it is necessary to provide a testable location that can be used as an alternative for testing.

In this example, the "specific size" is set to, for example, "1.27 mm." However, this is merely an example, and a larger size (for example, "1.64 mm") or smaller size (for example, "0.65 mm") may be set. In other words, this is merely a size that is currently considered appropriate depending on the background circumstances of the gaming machine field and the specifications of the measuring device used (for example, the size of the probe of a digital oscilloscope), and can be changed as appropriate to suit changes in these factors.

In addition, in this example, all ICs with specifications (Type 1 to Type 3) shown in the size table in Figure 42 have a terminal pitch of 1.27 mm or less, so in order to meet this condition, test points connected to each wiring are provided. This will be described later.

(3) If no dip-mounted components are connected to the wiring between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component, a test pattern (for example, a test point, described below) must be provided that is connected to that wiring. In short, this condition is not necessary if the terminal of the dip-mounted component can be accessed for testing under the same assumptions as in condition (2) above, but if there is no such testable location, it is necessary to provide a testable location that can be tested as an alternative.

As will be described in more detail later, in this example, there are no dip-mounted components connected to any of the wiring that connects IC3 and IC5, and there are no dip-mounted components connected to any of the wiring that connects IC4 and IC6. Therefore, to satisfy this condition, test points are provided that are connected to each of the wiring. This will be described later.

The above conditions (1) to (3) are merely examples that have been determined to be suitable from the above perspective. Therefore, in addition to the above conditions (1) to (3), it is possible to further determine conditions different from these, or it is also possible to not determine any of the above conditions (1) to (3). Furthermore, when connecting surface mount components together, it is also possible to provide test points without any conditions. Furthermore, when both the above conditions (2) and (3) are adopted, they may be in an AND relationship or an OR relationship.

For example, even if the terminal pitch of each of surface-mounted components connected by wiring is equal to or smaller than a specific size, it is not necessary to provide a test pattern if a dip-mounted component is connected to the wiring; or, even if no dip-mounted component is connected to the wiring between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component, it is not necessary to provide a test pattern if the terminal pitch of each of those surface-mounted components exceeds a specific size.

For example, it can be stipulated that if the terminal pitch of each of the surface-mounted components connected by wiring is equal to or smaller than a specific size, a test pattern must be provided even if a dip-mounted component is connected to the wiring, or that if a dip-mounted component is not connected to the wiring between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component, a test pattern must be provided even if the terminal pitch of each of the surface-mounted components exceeds a specific size.

(Example of the circuit pattern configuration of the main control board 411)
Next, an example of the circuit pattern of the main control board 411 will be described with reference to Fig. 43 to Fig. 45. Fig. 43 and Fig. 44 are diagrams showing an example of the circuit pattern of the area surrounded by the dotted line in Fig. 41, and are diagrams for explaining each component, and Fig. 45 is a diagram for explaining each test point (TP).

In Figures 43 and 44, the white areas with linear borders represent the insulated wiring patterns and ground patterns, with the narrower areas designated as 411c (wiring pattern 1) and the wider areas designated as 411d (wiring pattern 2). Note that in Figure 43, for ease of explanation, only some areas are labeled with reference numbers, but similarly labeled areas are essentially similar components. This also applies to the components described below. The width of 411c (wiring pattern 1) is, for example, 0.20 mm, and the width of 411d (wiring pattern 1) is, for example, 0.60 mm (see the size chart in Figure 44). However, it is not necessary for all areas to be the same width.

In addition, in Figures 43 and 44, the white circular areas outlined with thin lines represent VIA holes, with the smaller diameter one designated 411e (VIA hole 1) and the larger one designated 411f (VIA hole 2). 411e (VIA hole 1) has, for example, an outer diameter of 0.60 mm and an inner diameter of 0.30 mm (see the size table in Figure 44). Also, 411f (VIA hole 2) has, for example, an outer diameter of 0.80 mm and an inner diameter of 0.50 mm (see the size table in Figure 44). However, it is not necessary for all points to have the same diameter.

In addition, in Figures 43 and 44, the white circular area outlined in a thick line represents a through hole, which is designated as 411g (through hole). 411g (through hole) has, for example, an outer diameter of 1.40 mm and an inner diameter of 0.80 mm (see the size table in Figure 44). However, it is not necessary for the diameter to be the same at all points, and the outer and inner diameters can be set to match the thickness of the lead wire of the electronic component (dip-mounted component) to be mounted.

In addition, a capacitor (see Figure 48 below), which is a dip-mounted component with terminals formed by a pair of lead wires, is mounted in a pair of upper and lower through holes located to the left of each of the locations where IC3 to IC6 are mounted (see Figure 44).

Here, VIA holes and through holes are both through holes that penetrate between the front and back surfaces of a substrate, and are common components in that they are internally plated or otherwise configured to be electrically conductive. They are sometimes collectively referred to as "via (VIA) holes" or simply "vias (VIA)", and sometimes collectively referred to as "through holes". However, in this example, in order to distinguish between them and make the explanation easier to understand, VIA holes (via holes) are defined as simply through holes that are electrically conductive and do not have dip-mounted components mounted therein, and through holes are defined as through holes that are soldered when dip-mounted components are mounted (i.e., dip-mounted components are mounted therein) and are electrically conductive.

However, even VIA holes may be soldered when electronic components are mounted. In this case, solder is inserted into the VIA holes so that the entire through-hole is filled with solder. However, if the VIA holes are to remain as through-holes, a masking process is carried out during the soldering process to mount electronic components so that solder is not inserted into the VIA holes.

Note that even if a location is described as a VIA hole in this example, it can be configured as a through hole if it is a location where a dip-mounted component is mounted, and even if a location is described as a through hole in this example, it can be configured as a VIA hole if it is a location where a dip-mounted component is not necessarily mounted. In other words, even if the present invention is written as, for example, a "via hole" or "via", this includes the through hole as defined in this embodiment as long as it does not go against the purpose of the invention, and even if the present invention is written as, for example, a "through hole", this includes the VIA hole as defined in this embodiment as long as it does not go against the purpose of the invention.

In addition, in Figures 43 and 44, the area with diagonal lines slanting downwards to the right represents a power supply pattern for a 5V power supply, which is designated as 411h (+5V power supply pattern).In addition, in Figures 43 and 44, the gray area represents a GND surface as a so-called solid GND, which is designated as 411i (GND surface).

In addition, in Figs. 43 and 44, the black rectangular areas represent the solder surfaces (pads) to which the terminals of the surface-mounted components are soldered, and these are designated as 411j (solder surface (pad)). For example, at the locations where IC3 and IC4 are mounted (the locations where the 20 terminals of IC3 are soldered and the locations where the 20 terminals of IC4 are soldered as shown in Fig. 44), 411j (solder surface (pad)) has a width in the short direction (IC3-4 pad short) of 0.30 mm, a width in the long direction (IC3-4 pad long) of 1.00 mm, and a distance between the solder surfaces (between IC3-4 pads) of 0.40 mm (see the size table in Fig. 44). However, it is not necessary for all locations to have the same size or distance.

Also, 411j (solder surface (pad)), for example, at the locations where IC5 and IC6 are mounted (the locations where the 20 terminals of IC5 are soldered and the locations where the 20 terminals of IC6 are soldered as shown in FIG. 44), has a width in the short direction (short IC5-6 pad) of 0.40 mm, a width in the long direction (long IC5-6 pad) of 1.20 mm, and a distance between the solder surfaces (between IC5-6 pads) of 0.25 mm (see the size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary for the size or distance to be the same at all locations. As mentioned above, the terminal pitch of IC3 to IC6 (between pins IC3 to IC6) is, for example, 0.65 mm.

In addition, in Fig. 43 and Fig. 44, the black circular areas represent test points that are configured to be accessible by, for example, the probe of a digital oscilloscope, and these are designated as 411k (test point (TP)). 411k (TP) has a diameter of, for example, 1.00 mm (see the size table in Fig. 44). However, it is not necessary for the diameter to be the same at all points. Also, the diameter of the test point (TP) is merely an example, and it may be larger or smaller than that. In other words, as long as an inspection can be performed using a measuring instrument and the space can be secured on the main control board 411, a suitable diameter can be appropriately selected. Also, the test point (TP) does not necessarily have to be circular. For example, it may be a rectangle similar to 411j (solder surface (pad)) or another polygonal shape. Or it may be an irregular shape.

Also, for example, each test point (TP) (or at least the area between some test points (TP) and the other test points (TP)) may be configured to have a different shape, so that it is easy to recognize which wiring is being tested without having to check the wiring pattern. In either case, identification information indicating the type of test point (TP) (for example, information such as "TP1" to "TP16") may be printed on the insulating layer on the surface near each test point (TP), so that it is easy to recognize which wiring is being tested.

Although not shown in Figs. 43 to 45, in this example, the component mounting surface shown in Figs. 43 to 45 is provided with test points (TP), while the backside non-component mounting surface is configured to have no test points (TP). This is because even when the main control board case 460 is opened and the component mounting surface of the main control board 411 is accessible, the backside (non-component mounting surface) of the main control board 411 is still often fixed to the main control board case 460, and even if test points (TP) are provided there, inspection cannot be performed quickly. From this perspective, for example, it is possible to configure the device so that surface-mounted components are not mounted on the non-component mounting surface (in the gaming machine field, it is not permitted to mount electronic components on both sides of the main control board (main board) of a gaming machine, and electronic components are required to be mounted on one side), and surface-mounted components are mounted only on the component mounting surface, so that it is not necessary to perform inspection using test points (TP) on the non-component mounting surface.

In addition, in Figures 43 and 44, the plain white surfaces other than the above-mentioned areas represent surfaces on which no insulated wiring patterns or ground patterns exist, and are designated as 411l.

Now, the test points (TP) provided on the main control board 411, which is one of the characteristic parts of the main control board 411 in this example, will be described with reference to FIG. 45. Note that FIG. 45 further enlarges the test point (TP) portion of the circuit pattern of the main control board 411, a portion of which is shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44.

TP1 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 2nd terminal of IC3 and the 2nd terminal of IC5. For example, TP1 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A1 terminal of IC3 and the Q0 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP1 is provided by extending the wiring on the 2nd terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP1 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 2nd terminal of IC3 and the 2nd terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 2nd terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP1 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 2nd terminal of IC3 and the 2nd terminal of IC5.

TP2 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 3rd terminal of IC3 and the 5th terminal of IC5. For example, TP2 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A2 terminal of IC3 and the Q1 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP2 is provided by extending the wiring on the 3rd terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP2 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 3rd terminal of IC3 and the 5th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 5th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP2 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 3rd terminal of IC3 and the 5th terminal of IC5.

TP3 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 4th terminal of IC3 and the 6th terminal of IC5. For example, TP3 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A3 terminal of IC3 and the Q2 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP3 is provided by extending the wiring on the 4th terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP3 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 4th terminal of IC3 and the 6th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 6th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP3 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 4th terminal of IC3 and the 6th terminal of IC5.

TP4 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 5th terminal of IC3 and the 9th terminal of IC5. For example, TP4 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A4 terminal of IC3 and the Q3 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP4 is provided by extending the wiring on the 5th terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP4 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 5th terminal of IC3 and the 9th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 9th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP4 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 5th terminal of IC3 and the 9th terminal of IC5.

TP5 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 6th terminal of IC3 and the 12th terminal of IC5. For example, TP5 is a test point configured to be able to measure the current flow state between the A5 terminal of IC3 and the Q4 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP5 is provided by extending the wiring on the 6th terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP5 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 6th terminal of IC3 and the 12th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 12th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP5 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same current flow state as the wiring between the 6th terminal of IC3 and the 12th terminal of IC5.

TP6 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 7th terminal of IC3 and the 15th terminal of IC5. For example, TP6 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A6 terminal of IC3 and the Q5 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP6 is provided by extending the wiring on the 7th terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP6 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 7th terminal of IC3 and the 15th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 15th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP6 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 7th terminal of IC3 and the 15th terminal of IC5.

TP7 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 8th terminal of IC3 and the 16th terminal of IC5. For example, TP7 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A7 terminal of IC3 and the Q6 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP7 is provided by extending the wiring on the 8th terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP7 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 8th terminal of IC3 and the 16th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 16th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP7 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 8th terminal of IC3 and the 16th terminal of IC5.

TP8 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 9th terminal of IC3 and the 19th terminal of IC5. For example, TP8 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A8 terminal of IC3 and the Q7 terminal of IC5 in FIG. 41. TP8 is provided by extending the wiring on the 9th terminal side of IC3 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP8 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 9th terminal of IC3 and the 19th terminal of IC5 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 19th terminal side of IC5 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP8 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 9th terminal of IC3 and the 19th terminal of IC5.

TP9 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 2nd terminal of IC4 and the 2nd terminal of IC6. For example, TP9 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A1 terminal of IC4 and the Q0 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41. TP9 is provided by extending the wiring on the 2nd terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP9 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 2nd terminal of IC4 and the 2nd terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 2nd terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP9 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 2nd terminal of IC4 and the 2nd terminal of IC6.

TP10 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 3rd terminal of IC4 and the 5th terminal of IC6, and is configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A2 terminal of IC4 and the Q1 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41, for example. TP10 is provided by extending the wiring on the 3rd terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP10 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 3rd terminal of IC4 and the 5th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 5th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP10 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 3rd terminal of IC4 and the 5th terminal of IC6.

TP11 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 4th terminal of IC4 and the 6th terminal of IC6. For example, TP11 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A3 terminal of IC4 and the Q2 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41. TP11 is provided by extending the wiring on the 4th terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP11 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 4th terminal of IC4 and the 6th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 6th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP11 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 4th terminal of IC4 and the 6th terminal of IC6.

TP12 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 5th terminal of IC4 and the 9th terminal of IC6. For example, TP12 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A4 terminal of IC4 and the Q3 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41. TP12 is provided by extending the wiring on the 5th terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP12 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 5th terminal of IC4 and the 9th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 9th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP12 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 5th terminal of IC4 and the 9th terminal of IC6.

TP13 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 6th terminal of IC4 and the 12th terminal of IC6, and is configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A5 terminal of IC4 and the Q4 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41, for example. TP13 is provided by extending the wiring on the 6th terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP13 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 6th terminal of IC4 and the 12th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 12th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP13 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 6th terminal of IC4 and the 12th terminal of IC6.

TP14 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 7th terminal of IC4 and the 15th terminal of IC6. For example, TP14 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A6 terminal of IC4 and the Q5 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41. TP14 is provided by extending the wiring on the 7th terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP14 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 7th terminal of IC4 and the 15th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 15th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP14 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 7th terminal of IC4 and the 15th terminal of IC6.

TP15 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 8th terminal of IC4 and the 16th terminal of IC6. For example, TP15 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A7 terminal of IC4 and the Q6 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41. TP15 is provided by extending the wiring on the 8th terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP15 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 8th terminal of IC4 and the 16th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 16th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP15 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 8th terminal of IC4 and the 16th terminal of IC6.

TP16 is a test point connected to the wiring connecting the 9th terminal of IC4 and the 19th terminal of IC6. For example, TP16 is a test point configured to be able to measure the electrical connection between the A8 terminal of IC4 and the Q7 terminal of IC6 in FIG. 41. TP16 is provided by extending the wiring on the 9th terminal side of IC4 and connecting to the extended wiring, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, TP16 may be provided by branching the wiring connecting the 9th terminal of IC4 and the 19th terminal of IC6 and connecting to the branched wiring, or by extending the wiring on the 19th terminal side of IC6 and connecting to the extended wiring. In other words, TP16 may be provided anywhere as long as it is possible to grasp the same electrical connection state as the wiring between the 9th terminal of IC4 and the 19th terminal of IC6.

In this example, the main control board 411 is provided with test points (TP) to enable testing using a measuring instrument such as a digital oscilloscope, but the configuration (test pattern configuration) for enabling such testing is not limited to this. For example, a test pin (contact pin) may be implemented in a through hole connected to the wiring to be tested (provided in a location where the same electrical current status as the wiring can be grasped). In this way, for example, if the probe of the digital oscilloscope is a clip type, accessibility is improved compared to when a test point is provided, making it possible to improve the ease and convenience of testing. In other words, the locations described in this example as providing test points (TP) can be configured to have test pins implemented in some or all of them. Also, test points and test pins are merely examples of configurations for enabling such testing, and various configurations can be adopted as long as they enable appropriate testing.

(Example of configuration of electronic components that cannot be used on the main control board 411)
Next, referring to Fig. 46 and Fig. 47, a configuration example of electronic components (surface mounted components) that are disabled on the main control board 411 will be described. Fig. 46 shows an example of the configuration of a chip resistor, which is an example of such an electronic component, and Fig. 47 shows an example of the configuration of a chip capacitor, which is an example of such an electronic component.

A chip resistor (chip resistor) such as that shown in Figure 46 is an electronic component used to control the current of the wiring to which it is connected, and has, for example, a base portion made of a ceramic material or the like, a resistance portion (including the exterior) made of a suitable metal depending on the resistance value, and electrode portions that are connected (soldered) to the wiring when mounted.

Chip resistors come in a wide variety of specifications (e.g., Type 1 to Type 9), as shown in the size chart in Figure 46. Looking at the size, for example, Types 1 to 6 have a surface area (the product of the longitudinal length L and the lateral length W in Figure 46) that does not exceed 6 square millimeters (6 mm2). In other words, they are surface mount components that do not satisfy the above condition (1). Therefore, in this example, in accordance with the above condition (1), these chip resistors cannot be used.

For example, since Type 7 to Type 9 have a surface area exceeding 6 square mm (6 mm2), these chip resistors are permitted for use under condition (1) above. However, it may be determined that such chip resistors as surface mount components are prohibited from use regardless of their size (in this case, a resistor as a dip component as shown in Figure 48 below may be used).

Also, a chip capacitor (capacitor) such as that shown in Figure 47 is an electronic component used to control the current of the wiring to which it is connected, and has, for example, a dielectric portion made by laminating ceramic material and internal electrodes (as a ceramic capacitor) or aluminum material (as an electrolytic capacitor), and an electrode portion that is connected (soldered) to the wiring when mounted.

Chip capacitors also come in a wide variety of specifications (e.g., Types 1 to 5), as shown in the size chart in Figure 47. Looking at the size, for example, Types 1 to 4 have a surface area (the product of the length L in the longitudinal direction and the length W in the lateral direction in Figure 47) that does not exceed 6 square millimeters (6 mm2). In other words, they are surface mount components that do not satisfy the condition (1) above. Therefore, in this example, in accordance with the condition (1) above, these chip capacitors cannot be used.

For example, Type 5 has a surface area exceeding 6 mm2 (6 mm2), and therefore this chip capacitor can be used in accordance with condition (1) above. However, it may be determined that such chip capacitors as surface mount components cannot be used regardless of their size (in this case, a capacitor as a dip component as shown in Figure 49 below can be used).

(Examples of configurations of DIP components that can be mounted on the main control board 411)
Next, referring to Fig. 48 and Fig. 49, a configuration example of a DIP component that can be mounted on the main control board 411 will be described. Fig. 48 shows a configuration example of a resistor, which is an example of such a DIP component, and Fig. 49 shows a configuration example of a capacitor, which is an example of such a DIP component.

A resistor (resistor) such as that shown in FIG. 48 has, for example, a cylindrically shaped resistive portion (including a base portion made of a ceramic material or the like, a resistor body made of a suitable metal depending on the resistance value, and an exterior, etc.) and a pair of lead wires (terminals) protruding from both ends of the resistive portion. As shown in FIG. 48, when the pair of lead wires are mounted on the component mounting surface, they are bent and inserted from the opening of the through hole on the component mounting surface, and the inside and adjacent parts of the lead wires are soldered on the component mounting surface and non-component mounting surface. In addition, in such a DIP component, the current flow status can be measured by contacting the tip of the probe of a digital oscilloscope with the lead wire. This is also the same for the capacitor described below.

In addition, resistors as dip components also come in a wide variety of specifications (e.g., Type 1 to Type 4), as shown in the size table in Figure 48. The dimensions of these before bending (see "Before Processing" in Figure 48) and after bending (see "After Processing" in Figure 48) are as shown in the size table in Figure 48. It is also possible to bend these in a different manner (see "Another Example After Processing" in Figure 48). If it is necessary to extend the lead wire when bending in a different manner, it is also possible to extend it appropriately.

In addition, such resistors are provided with multiple colorable band areas (see "1" to "4" under "After Processing" in Figure 48) on the resistor part, and are configured so that the resistance value and tolerance of the resistor can be visually recognized depending on the color of the band areas (the color code). Here, the "1" area indicates the first digit (the tens digit), the "2" area indicates the second digit (the units digit), the "3" area indicates the magnification (multiplier), and the "4" area indicates the tolerance. For example, if the color codes are, from left to right, "brown (1)," "black (0)," "orange (1000)," and "gold (±5%)," the resistance value and tolerance of the resistor are "10 kΩ (±5%)."

A capacitor such as that shown in Figure 49 has a dielectric portion made of laminated ceramic materials and internal electrodes (as a ceramic capacitor) or aluminum material (as an electrolytic capacitor), and a pair of lead wires (terminals) protruding from one end of the dielectric portion. When mounted on the component mounting surface, the pair of lead wires are inserted from the openings of the through holes on the component mounting surface, and the inside and adjacent parts of the lead wires are soldered on the component mounting surface and non-component mounting surface.

Note that Figure 49 shows an example of a ceramic capacitor whose lead wires are taped in an outside crimp shape ("outside crimp" in Figure 49) and an example of a ceramic capacitor whose lead wires are taped in an inside crimp shape ("inside crimp" in Figure 49). Note that, generally, an outside crimp shape has a larger capacitance than an inside crimp shape. Also, although not shown in the figure, it is also possible to mount other capacitors such as electrolytic capacitors and film capacitors as dip components on the main control board 411.

As for capacitors as dip components, for example, as shown in the size table in Figure 49, there are many different specifications (for example, Types 1 to 6 for outside crimp, and Types 1 to 5 for inside crimp). The dimensions of each of these are as shown in the size table in Figure 49, but for example, for the capacitor to be mounted in Figure 44, Type 5 or Type 6 for outside crimp, or Types 1 to 5 for inside crimp, are selected from the perspective of capacitance and outer diameter size.

[10-4. Example of mounting board management information on main control board according to another example]
Next, with reference to Figures 50 to 59, an example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another embodiment will be described. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining an example of mounting board management information on a main control board of a conventional gaming machine, Figures 51 and 52 are diagrams for explaining an example 1 of mounting board management information on a main control board 411, Figures 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining an example 2 of mounting board management information on a main control board 411, Figures 55 and 56 are diagrams for explaining an example 3 of mounting board management information on a main control board 411, Figures 57 and 58 are diagrams for explaining an example 4 of mounting board management information on a main control board 411, and Figure 59 is a diagram for explaining a printing example of a rewritable film 543 on a main control board 411.

Conventionally, the main control board (also called the "main board") used in gaming machines is required to be sealed in a transparent board case (also called the "main board case") from the perspective of preventing fraud, etc. Furthermore, the board case is required to be one that leaves a trace when it is opened (for example, see Appendix 3 (1) (i) (iii) of the Regulations Concerning the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines).

From a similar perspective, (a) the name or trade name of the manufacturer or importer of the gaming machine, and (b) a number, symbol or other code for identifying the model of the main board, are required to be printed on the surface of the main control board and displayed in an easily identifiable manner (for example, see Regulations Concerning the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines: Appendix 3(1)(i)(g)).

Such information is unique to each model of gaming machine (in this example, this will be described as "board management information," "unique information," or simply "identification information"), and for example, even if gaming machines are manufactured by the same gaming machine manufacturer and equipped with main control boards of the same specifications, if they are different models, they will have different board management information.

First, referring to FIG. 50, an example of mounting of conventional board management information will be described. For example, on the component mounting surface of the main control board (here, for ease of explanation, it is assumed to be the same main control board 411 as in this example), a unique information display section (here, for ease of explanation, it is assumed to be the same unique information display section 541 as in this example) for displaying board management information is provided at an arbitrary position (for example, on surface 411l where the above-mentioned insulated wiring patterns and ground pattern are not present) that does not affect at least the above-mentioned wiring patterns 411c and 411d.

In this conventional example, the unique information display section displays board management information consisting of, for example, the "maker's name" (name of manufacturer), which corresponds to the above (a), and the model number (board management number) "****-****", which corresponds to the above (b), and this information is printed directly on the board surface (component mounting surface) by laser.

According to such conventional examples, although markings that meet the above-mentioned requirements are made, for example, when trying to collect a gaming machine that has been installed in an amusement facility and reuse its main control board, this can only be done for gaming machines of the same model (type) made by the same gaming machine manufacturer. In other words, when considering the life cycle of a certain model of gaming machine from when it is released to the market until it is removed, it becomes practically difficult to reuse it.

Here, in this embodiment, assuming that a space capable of printing multiple different board management information is secured on the component mounting surface of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 35, for example, a method is proposed in which, when reusing a main control board on which the first board management information is printed, the printed first board management information is deleted by laser engraving and then the second board management information is printed.

However, in recent years, as the roles of main control boards have become more diverse, it is often the case that such space cannot be secured sufficiently. Given this reality, it is necessary to consider a method that allows the display content of board management information to be changed while still using the same amount of space as before.

In this example, we propose a method that allows the board management information to be rewritten with a simple configuration without taking up space on the main control board (realizing space saving), and that reduces manufacturing costs by reusing the main control board. With the method described below, not only can the same main control board be reused for gaming machines of different models (types) from the same gaming machine manufacturer, but a main control board used in one model (type) from one gaming machine manufacturer can also be easily reused in other models (types) from another gaming machine manufacturer.

In this example, this method is achieved by configuring the unique information display unit 541 to include a rewritable film 543, which is a rewritable thermal film, as described below. This is one of the characteristic parts of the main control board 411 in this example, and specific examples are described below as installation examples 1 to 4.

In this example, the rewritable film 543 can be, for example, a rewritable laser medium (label) from a rewritable laser system manufactured by Ricoh Co., Ltd. This rewritable laser system uses a laser irradiation unit in a rewritable laser marker device (laser printing device) to rewrite (print and erase) information displayed on the rewritable laser medium (label) when it is attached to a device, allowing it to be rewritten approximately 1,000 times without having to be removed.

The rewritable laser media (label) is constructed, for example, by laminating a recording layer, an oxygen barrier layer, and a UV barrier layer on top of a base material of silver polyester film (white PET) with a white surface coating, and is capable of withstanding the heat of laser irradiation of approximately 160°C during printing (approximately 100°C during erasure). Note that the thermal film that can be used as the rewritable film 543 in this example is not limited to this. Any film that meets similar requirements can be used as appropriate.

(Example 1 of mounting board management information on the main control board 411)
Next, with reference to Fig. 51 and Fig. 52, a description will be given of a mounting example 1 of board management information in the main control board 411. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 1, and Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 1 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 51, the component mounting surface of the main control board 411 is provided with a unique information display unit 541 for displaying board management information at any position (for example, on surface 411l where the insulated wiring patterns and ground patterns are not present) that does not affect at least the above-mentioned wiring patterns 411c and 411d. Note that the unique information display unit 541 may be provided, for example, on the above-mentioned GND surface 411i. This also applies to the unique information display unit 541 in mounting examples 2 to 4 described below.

In addition, the main control board case 460 is not shown in Figures 51 and 52, but as described above, the main control board 411 is installed inside the slot machine 401 while housed in the transparent main control board case 460, and the unique information display unit 541 is provided in a position that is visible in that state (i.e., on the component mounting surface, in a position where its visibility is not obstructed by the components of the main control board case 460). This also applies to the unique information display unit 541 in installation examples 2 to 4 described below.

In the first installation example, (1) the unique information display unit 541 is configured to include a rewritable film 543 on which the displayed information can be rewritten. The specific configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. 52.

As described above, the main control board 411 is configured as a printed circuit board (PCB), and the unique information display unit 541 is also a part of it. Note that since the unique information display unit 541 does not have a wiring pattern (i.e., the copper foil has been removed), it is not shown in Figure 52.

As shown in FIG. 52, resist layers 545 (the resist layer on the component mounting side (i.e., the side on which the unique information display unit 541 is provided) is referred to as resist layer 545a, and the resist layer on the non-component mounting side (i.e., the side on which the unique information display unit 541 is not provided) is referred to as resist layer 545b) are laminated on both sides of the substrate body 544 as insulating layers.

Note that since no electronic components are mounted on the unique information display section 541, it is not shown in Figures 51 and 52, but component information for identifying the mounted electronic components is printed on the surface of the resist layer 545 (e.g., resist layer 545a, which is the component mounting surface). For example, in Figure 44, component information labeled "IC3" is printed near the location where IC3 is mounted (the same applies to IC4 to IC6).

Furthermore, for example, component information labeled, for example, "CP1" is printed near the capacitor mounted to the left of IC3, component information labeled, for example, "CP2" is printed near the capacitor mounted to the left of IC4, component information labeled, for example, "CP3" is printed near the capacitor mounted to the left of IC5, and component information labeled, for example, "CP4" is printed near the capacitor mounted to the left of IC6.

The rewritable film 543 is configured to be disposed between the substrate body 544 and the resist layer 545a in the unique information display section 541. The rewritable film 543 has a sticker on the reverse side of the printed surface, allowing it to be attached to the substrate body 544. In other words, in this example, the rewritable film 543 is attached to the substrate body 544, and the resist layer 545a is laminated on top of it.

However, since the rewritable film 543 is ultimately protected and fixed by the resist layer 545a, it may be configured so that the resist layer 545a is laminated while the rewritable film 543 is placed on the substrate body 544 without being attached to the substrate body 544 (i.e., the reverse side of the printed surface is not a seal). Alternatively, it may be configured so that it can be attached to the reverse side of the resist layer 545a (i.e., the printed surface is a seal), and when the resist layer 545a is laminated, it may be placed on the substrate body 544.

As long as the rewritable film 543 is not easily peeled off, it may be attached to the surface of the resist layer 545a, or it may be fixed by other means. In other words, any of the above may be adopted as long as the rewritable film 543 can be used to change the display of the board management information by rewriting it without changing any other configuration of the main control board 411.

Here, in mounting example 1, since the rewritable film 543 is disposed between the board body 544 and the resist layer 545a in the unique information display section 541, it is necessary to configure the board management information so that it can be rewritten from the outside of the resist layer 545a. Therefore, in this example, at least the resist layer 545a is configured to be transparent or semi-transparent. In this case, for example, the resist layer 545a may be configured with a solder resist material having a certain degree of heat resistance (at least capable of withstanding a temperature higher than the heat of laser irradiation during printing) and transparency (at least not interfering with laser irradiation during printing). Note that "semi-transparent" here means a transparency that is lower than complete transparency, but does not interfere with printing on the rewritable film 543. Also, the resist layer 545b may be configured in the same way or differently.

In addition, in mounting example 1, the dimensions of each component are as shown in the size table in FIG. 52. In the size table in FIG. 52, "rewritable film" represents the rewritable film 543, "substrate" represents the substrate main body 544 in the unique information display section 541, and "resist thickness" represents the thickness (e.g., 0.02 mm) of the resist layer 545a (as described above, the resist layer 545b may have the same configuration as the resist layer 545a or may have a different configuration). Note that these are merely examples, and the sizes are not limited to these.

For example, the board body 544 can be of various thicknesses, as shown in the size table of FIG. 52. The size (length x width) of the unique information display section 541 can be any size as long as it is not smaller than the size of the rewritable film 543 and space is available on the main control board 411. The size of the rewritable film 543 can be any size as long as the necessary information can be displayed appropriately. The thickness of the resist layer 545a can be any thickness as long as the component mounting surface of the main control board 411 is appropriately protected and there is no hindrance to rewriting the rewritable film 543.

The thickness of the resist layer 545a is exemplified as "0.02 mm" assuming that the solder resist ink is applied once, and it is possible to increase the number of times the solder resist ink is applied to make it thicker. For example, if you want to make the resist layer 545a 0.06 mm thick, you can achieve this by applying the solder resist ink three times. However, if the resist layer 545a becomes thicker, the protective function as an insulating layer will improve, but the transparency will decrease. Therefore, the thickness of the resist layer 545a (in other words, the number of times the solder resist ink is applied) should be selected by comprehensively considering the visibility of the board management information printed on the rewritable film 543, the quality at the time of printing or erasing, etc. For example, if there is no problem (or is unlikely to be any problem) with these, the thickness of the resist layer 545a may be set to 0.06 mm (the number of times the solder resist ink is applied three times) to improve the protective function (durability). This also applies to installation examples 2 to 4 described below.

(Example 2 of mounting board management information on the main control board 411)
Next, with reference to Fig. 53 and Fig. 54, a description will be given of a mounting example 2 of board management information in the main control board 411. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 2, and Fig. 54 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 2 is provided.

As is clear from a comparison of Figures 51 and 53, or Figures 52 and 54, for example, Mounting Example 2 adds the specific configuration of (2) below to Mounting Example 1, and is configured in the same way as Mounting Example 1 with respect to the specific configuration of (1) above. Therefore, here, the specific configuration of (2) below will be explained, and the explanation of the specific configuration of (1) above will be omitted.

In mounting example 2, (2) the unique information display section 541 has a recess 546 formed therein that corresponds to the thickness of the rewritable film 543. The specific configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 54, the substrate body 544 in the unique information display section 541 is provided with a recess 546 formed in a concave shape in a cross-sectional view. The recess 546 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the rewritable film 543 (see the length x width of "rewritable film" in the size table of FIG. 54) in a front view (see FIG. 53) (in other words, a shape whose length and width are set to be greater than or equal to the length and width of the rewritable film 543 so that the rewritable film 543 can be placed thereon), and is formed in a depth corresponding to the thickness of the rewritable film 543 (see the thickness of "rewritable film" in the size table of FIG. 54) in a cross-sectional view (see FIG. 54) (in other words, a depth that does not protrude from the surface of the substrate body 544 when the rewritable film 543 is placed thereon).

As shown in the size table of FIG. 54 (see "Recess" in the size table of FIG. 54), the depth of recess 546 may be, for example, 0.3 mm, the same as the thickness of rewritable film 543, so that when rewritable film 543 is placed in recess 546, the top surface of rewritable film 543 is flat with the surface of substrate body 544, or may be 0.8 mm, so that it is deeper than the thickness of rewritable film 543, so that when rewritable film 543 is placed in recess 546, the top surface of rewritable film 543 is lower than the surface of substrate body 544. In other words, any depth can be used as long as it does not interfere with rewriting of rewritable film 543.

However, since mounting example 2 is intended to prevent the substrate itself from becoming thicker and the resist layer 545a from becoming more easily peeled off by placing the rewritable film 543 directly on the surface of the substrate body 544 in mounting example 1, from this viewpoint, it is preferable that the recess 546 is configured to be at least deeper than the thickness of the rewritable film 543 (i.e., a depth of 0.3 mm or more to about 1.0 mm).

In the example shown in FIG. 54, when the rewritable film 543 is placed in the recess 546, the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 is lower than the surface of the substrate body 544 (for example, the depth is 0.08 mm). In this case, as in mounting example 1, the solder resist ink is also applied to the recess 546 (and the upper surface of the rewritable film 543), so that the area in the recess 546 excluding the rewritable film 543 becomes part of the resist layer 545a. Here, in the recess 546, for example, by increasing the number of times that the solder resist ink is applied (or applying an amount that makes the upper surface uniform), the resist layer 545a on the upper surface of the substrate body 544 other than the unique information display section 541 and the resist layer 545a in the recess 546 can be configured to be flat (or approximately flat) as shown in FIG. 54, but the manner in which the resist layer 545a is formed in the recess 546 is not limited to this.

For example, in the recess 546, the number of times the solder resist ink is applied may not be increased (or an amount that makes the upper surface uniform may not be applied), and the resist layer 545a on the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 in the recess 546 may be configured to be lower than the resist layer 545a on the upper surface of the board main body 544 other than the unique information display section 541 by the depth of the recess 546. Alternatively, for example, if the resist layer 545a is formed from a transparent resist film, the recess 546 may be configured to have a gap therein. This is also true for mounting example 4 described below.

(Example 3 of mounting board management information on the main control board 411)
Next, with reference to Fig. 55 and Fig. 56, a description will be given of a mounting example 3 of board management information in the main control board 411. Fig. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 3, and Fig. 56 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 3 is provided.

As is clear from a comparison of Figures 51 and 55, or Figures 52 and 56, for example, Mounting Example 3 adds the specific configuration of (3) below to Mounting Example 1, and is configured in the same way as Mounting Example 1 with respect to the specific configuration of (1) above. Therefore, here, the specific configuration of (3) below will be explained, and the explanation of the specific configuration of (1) above will be omitted.

In mounting example 3, (3) in the unique information display section 541, a transparent plate 547 is attached to the outside of the resist layer 545a and is fixed to the substrate body 544 by a locking pin 548. The specific configuration is described below with reference to FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the unique information display section 541, the substrate body 544 has through holes 549 formed between the surface on which the unique information display section 541 is provided (i.e., the resist layer 545a side) and the surface on which the unique information display section 541 is not provided (i.e., the resist layer 545b side). As shown in FIG. 55, the through holes 549 are provided in four locations corresponding to the four corners of the rectangular transparent plate 547 (in FIG. 55, the lower left one is through hole 549a, the lower right one is through hole 549b, the upper right one is through hole 549c, and the upper left one is through hole 549d).

In addition, the transparent plate 547 has locking holes (reference numerals omitted) formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 549a, 549b, 549c, and 549d. When a locking pin 548 (locking pin 548a is inserted into through hole 549a and its corresponding locking hole, locking pin 548b is inserted into through hole 549b and its corresponding locking hole, locking pin 548c is inserted into through hole 549c and its corresponding locking hole, and locking pin 548d is inserted into through hole 549d and its corresponding locking hole) is inserted into each locking hole and through hole, the body portion (reference numerals omitted) of the locking pin 548 is inserted into the resist layer 545b side, but the head portion (reference numerals omitted) of the locking pin 548 is configured to be locked in the locking hole of the transparent plate 547.

The end of the body of the locking pin 548 protruding from the resist layer 545b side is soldered to a solder part (not shown) provided on the outer periphery of the through hole 549. In this way, the transparent plate 547 is fixed to the board body 544.

However, the manner in which the through holes 549 are provided is not limited to this. For example, the transparent plate 547 may have one locking hole each in the left center (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole in which the locking pin 548a is locked and the locking hole in which the locking pin 548b is locked) and one in the right center (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole in which the locking pin 548c is locked and the locking hole in which the locking pin 548d is locked), and correspondingly, the through holes 549 may also be provided in one each on the left and right sides of the fixed display unit 541. Also, for example, the transparent plate 547 may have one locking hole each in its upper center (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole for locking pin 548c and the locking hole for locking pin 548d) and in its lower center (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole for locking pin 548a and the locking hole for locking pin 548b), and correspondingly, the through holes 549 may be provided in one each at the top and bottom of the fixed display portion 541. That is, the number of fixing points of the transparent plate 547 may be less than four or may be more than four, as long as the transparent plate 547 can be fixed with a certain strength.

From a similar perspective, the method of fixing the transparent plate 547 to the substrate body 544 is not limited to the method using the locking pin 548 described above. For example, it may be fixed to the substrate body 544 using an adhesive. Alternatively, the periphery (or a part of it) of the transparent plate 547 may be plated, and the substrate body 544 may have a solder surface at the fixed display portion 541, and the transparent plate 547 may be fixed to the substrate body 544 by soldering. In other words, as long as the transparent plate 547 can be appropriately fixed to the substrate body 544, any fixing member may be used to fix the transparent plate 547.

Here, in mounting example 3, since the rewritable film 543 is disposed between the substrate body 544 and the transparent plate 547 in the unique information display section 541, it is necessary to configure the substrate management information so that it can be rewritten from the outside of the transparent plate 547. Therefore, in this example, for example, the transparent plate 547 may be configured from an acrylic material or the like that has a certain degree of heat resistance (at least the ability to withstand temperatures higher than the heat of the laser irradiation during printing) and transparency (at least no hindrance to the laser irradiation during printing). Note that, as just one example, an Aronix (registered trademark) sheet (glass-substitute resin) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. may be used for the transparent plate 547.

The dimensions (length, width, and thickness) of the transparent plate 547 are as shown in the size chart in Figure 56, but this is merely one example. In other words, the transparent plate 547 can be any size as long as it does not interfere with rewriting of the rewritable film 543, it properly protects the rewritable film 543 without interfering with the display of the rewritable film 543, and it can be fixed to the substrate body 544.

In the mounting example 3, the back side of the transparent plate 547 (the surface on the side of the substrate body 544) is in close contact with the resist layer 545a laminated on the top surface of the rewritable film 543, but is not in close contact with the resist layer 545a on the other surfaces (i.e., a gap is provided between the resist layer 545a). However, the manner in which the gap is provided is not limited to this. For example, the length of the body part of the locking pin 548 may be adjusted, and when the end of the body part of the locking pin 548 is soldered on the surface on which the unique information display unit 541 is not provided, a certain gap may be formed between the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a laminated on the top surface of the rewritable film 543. In other words, the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a are not in close contact, and a gap may be provided on all surfaces.

(Example 4 of mounting board management information on the main control board 411)
Next, with reference to Fig. 57 and Fig. 58, a description will be given of a mounting example 4 of board management information in the main control board 411. Fig. 57 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 4, and Fig. 58 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display unit 541 in mounting example 4 is provided.

As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 51 and FIG. 57, or between FIG. 52 and FIG. 58, Mounting Example 4 adds the specific configurations (2) and (3) to Mounting Example 1, and is configured in the same manner as Mounting Example 1 with respect to the specific configuration of (1). As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 53 and FIG. 57, or between FIG. 54 and FIG. 58, Mounting Example 4 adds the specific configuration of (3) to Mounting Example 2, and is configured in the same manner as Mounting Example 2 with respect to the specific configuration of (2). As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 55 and FIG. 57, or between FIG. 56 and FIG. 58, Mounting Example 4 adds the specific configuration of (2) to Mounting Example 3, and is configured in the same manner as Mounting Example 3 with respect to the specific configuration of (3).

In other words, mounting example 4 is configured to include all of the specific configurations (1) to (3) above, and the specific configurations (1) to (3) above are the same as those already explained. Therefore, the explanation of these specific configurations will be omitted below.

In addition, in mounting example 4, the back side of the transparent plate 547 (the surface facing the substrate body 544) is basically configured to be in close contact with the resist layer 545a (i.e., no gap is provided between the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a). However, the positional relationship between the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a is not limited to this. For example, the length of the body part of the locking pin 548 may be adjusted so that when the end of the body part of the locking pin 548 is soldered on the surface on which the unique information display unit 541 is not provided, a certain gap is generated between the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a. In other words, the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a may not be in close contact with each other, and a gap may be provided on all surfaces.

Also, for example, a spacer may be placed at a predetermined position (e.g., around the opening of the through-hole 549) of the substrate body 544 in the unique information display section 541, and the resist layer 545a may be formed to coat the substrate body 544 from above the spacer, so that when the transparent plate 547 is attached, the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a are in close contact with each other at the spacer portion, but are not in close contact with each other at other portions.

(Example of rewritable film printing on main control board 411)
Next, an example of printing on the rewritable film 543 on the main control board 411 will be described with reference to Fig. 59. As described above, the rewritable film 543 is configured to be rewritable, so that various board management information can be printed thereon, and Fig. 59 shows an example of this.

Figure 59A is an example of printing the manufacturer's name ("Manufacturer Name" in Figure 59A) and the model number (board control number) ("****-****" in Figure 59A). Note that in this example, for example, after printing the content shown in Figure 59A, it is possible to erase it and reprint the content shown in Figure 59B or Figure 59C, so any information required as appropriate can be printed, including these examples. Of course, the information printed is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate.

Figure 59B also shows an example of the above-mentioned manufacturer's name ("Manufacturer's Name" in Figure 59B), the above-mentioned model number (board management number) ("****-****" in Figure 59B), and a code ("Board Management Barcode" in Figure 59B) that is readable by a specific device (e.g., a barcode reader, etc.) and that identifies the unique information.

Figure 59C shows an example of the above-mentioned manufacturer's name ("Manufacturer's Name" in Figure 59C), the above-mentioned model number (board management number) ("****-****" in Figure 59C), and a code ("QR Code (registered trademark) for board management" in Figure 59C) that is readable by a specific device (e.g., a mobile terminal, etc.) and that identifies unique information.

In addition, in Figures 59B and 59C, the manufacturer's name and model number (board control number) may be omitted and only the above-mentioned codes may be printed, so long as appropriate display that meets the above requirements is performed.

[10-5. Expansion example of main control board according to another example]
Up to this point, a gaming machine (slot machine 401) equipped with a main control board (main control board 411) according to another example has been described, but the configuration is not limited to the above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example. Such an extension example can also be applied to the slot machine 1 equipped with the main control board 71. In other words, the extension example shown below can be applied to everything described as the main control board (including the configuration of its peripheral parts) in this embodiment. In addition, it can also be applied to control boards other than the main control board (for example, the sub-control board 412, the door relay board 413, or the sub-relay board 414, etc.) within the scope of the purpose of the invention.

(The back side of the main control board can be seen.)
As described above, the main control board 411 is attached to the inside of the slot machine 1 while being housed in the main control board case 460, and in this state, the side on which the components are mounted is the front side, making it easy to see from the outside, while the side on which the components are not mounted is the back side, making it difficult to see from the outside. However, the configuration of the main control board case 460 is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a structure that allows the back side of the main control board 411 to be easily seen, for example.

This makes it easier to check, for example, whether the board uses surface mount components (or which electronic components are surface mount components) during the manufacturing process, whether the board uses dip components (or which electronic components are dip components), etc., making it easier to check even after assembly is complete whether the board (or electronic components) are installed correctly, and also makes it easier to check whether any tools for illegal tampering have been attached to the back side of the main control board 411 after it has been installed in the game center. In other words, this has the effect of improving convenience during checking. Therefore, it is desirable to have a structure in which the back side of the main control board 411 can be easily viewed without opening (unpacking) the main control board case 460 while it is housed therein. An example of the specifications is described below.

For example, the main control board case 460 can be configured to have a rotatable (rotatable) structure when installed in the slot machine 401 (when attached inside the slot machine 401), and the back side of the main control board 411 can be made visible by rotating the main control board case 460. In this case, the main control board case 460 is configured as a combination of a base body on which the main control board 411 is placed (i.e., the side that makes the back side of the main control board 411 visible) and a cover body that serves as a lid for the base body (i.e., the side that makes the front side of the main control board 411 visible), and is configured to be able to be attached to a predetermined position inside the slot machine 401 with the main control board 411 housed inside so that the board surface is perpendicular (approximately perpendicular) to the bottom or top surface of the housing (housing 2), for example, as in the main control board 71 shown in FIG. 2.

The mounting position of the main control board case 460 may be, for example, the back side of the front door, as in the main control board 71 shown in FIG. 2 (in this case, the front surface (component mounting surface) of the main control board 411 faces the back wall (back wall G3) of the cabinet when the front door is closed, so it is visible from the outside when the front door is open, while the back surface (non-component mounting surface) of the main control board 411 faces the opposite side from the front surface, so it is not visible from the outside just by opening the front door), or it may be at any position on the back wall inside the cabinet (in this case, the front surface (component mounting surface) of the main control board 411 faces the back side of the front door when the front door is closed, so it is visible from the outside when the front door is open, while the back surface (non-component mounting surface) of the main control board 411 faces the opposite side from the front surface, so it is not visible from the outside just by opening the front door). Or it may be at any position on the side wall (side wall G2) inside the cabinet.

The main control board case 460 is provided with a pivot shaft at one end (e.g., the lower end) that functions as a pivot shaft, and a holding member that is fixed at the mounting position of the main control board case 460 and can support the pivot shaft is provided, and when the main control board case 460 is mounted on the holding member, the main control board case 460 is held in a rotatable state by the holding member (including a case in which the main control board case 460 and the holding member are assembled in advance and attached to the mounting position to achieve a similar configuration). The other end (e.g., the upper end) of the main control board case 460 is provided with a switching mechanism (e.g., a push fastener, which is a fixture consisting of a push pin and a receiving part that can switch between an engaged state and a disengaged state (i.e., a state in which the main control board case 460 cannot be rotated) with the holding member and a disengaged state (i.e., a state in which the main control board case 460 can be rotated) that can be switched between the engaged state and the disengaged state with the holding member by hand without using a tool).

When an operator (e.g., an attendant at an amusement arcade) wants to check the back side of the main control board 411, the operator can operate the switching mechanism (e.g., by pulling a push fastener) to release the engagement, thereby making it possible to rotate the main control board case 460 toward the operator (e.g., by opening the upper end and using the lower end pivot shaft as the pivot shaft), thereby making it possible to view the back side of the main control board 411. As another example of the switching mechanism, for example, a screw fastening mechanism that allows the holding member and the main control board case 460 to be screwed from the outside can be used. In other words, any structure can be applied as long as it allows the holding member and the other end of the main control board case 460 to be detached without destroying the holding member or the main control board case 460.

The direction of rotation of the main control board case 460 may be determined according to the mounting position of the main control board case 460 (in other words, the main control board 411) in such a way that sufficient space for rotation is secured (when applied to a pachinko machine, the space on the rear side of the pachinko machine is taken into consideration). For example, the rotation shaft may be provided at the lower end (or upper end) so that the main control board case 460 rotates vertically, or the rotation shaft may be provided at the left end (or right end) so that the main control board case 460 rotates horizontally. It is desirable that the rotation angle be at least 15 degrees or more so that the back side of the board can be seen. However, in order to make the back side of the board easier to see, it is desirable to secure an angle of about 90 degrees as long as space is available.

In addition, it is desirable to arrange the main control board case 460 so that it does not collide with other components (such as the outer wall of the reel unit) when rotated, but as long as it does not collide with other components at a rotation angle position where the back surface of the board is visible (for example, a position rotated 15 degrees from the fixed position), such a structure may be adopted even if it may collide with other components at a further rotation angle position (for example, a position rotated 30 degrees from the fixed position). However, it is desirable to adopt an arrangement and rotation angle that does not collide with components that are not desirable to be subjected to impact (for example, the board cases that house the sub-control board 412, door relay board 413, sub-relay board 414, etc., and the power supply unit 415, etc.).

The main control board case 460 may also be configured so that the front and back sides of the main control board 411 can be seen without rotating it. For example, the main control board case 460 (its side end) may be attached to a predetermined position inside the slot machine 401 so that the front side of the main control board 411 faces the top of the housing and the back side faces the bottom of the housing (i.e., so that the board surface is parallel (approximately parallel) to the bottom or top surface of the housing (housing 2)), and further, at that attachment position, space may be secured to allow the board surface to be seen on both the front and back sides of the main control board 411.

In the main control board case 460, the base body and the cover body are fixed by a sealing member (called "case crimp") that is configured to leave a trace when the case is opened, and the main control board case 460 (for example, it may include a holding member or may not include a holding member) and the gaming machine main body (for example, if the main control board case 460 includes a holding member, it may refer to other components at the mounting position of the holding member, or if it does not include a holding member, it may refer to the holding member or other components in its vicinity) may be fixed by a sealing member (called "main body crimp") that is configured to leave a trace when the main control board case 460 is removed. In other words, it can be configured to have a case crimp but not a main body crimp, or it can be configured to have a case crimp and then a main body crimp.

(Materials indicated on main control board case)
When collecting gaming machines that have been installed in gaming establishments and trying to reuse their components, there are two possible cases: reuse by reuse and reuse by recycling. Reuse here means reusing them as they are. For example, the collected main control board case 460 may be incorporated as is into another model of the same structure. On the other hand, recycling here means that gaming machine manufacturers or recyclers collect disassembled parts as materials and reprocess them to regenerate them into new materials. For example, plastic components of gaming machines may be collected and recycled into new plastics.

As described above, in this example, the method using the rewritable film 543 allows the main control board 411 to be reused many times, but for example, the main control board case 460 cannot be reused as is and may be recycled. Here, the transparent resin used for the main control board case 460 is made of multiple types of material, so recycling becomes difficult if the material cannot be identified, and there is also the problem that it is difficult to identify the material from appearance.

Therefore, a marking (material identification marking) that identifies the material may be attached to a part of the main control board case 460. This can have the effect of improving reusability. For example, if the material is polycarbonate, the main control board case 460 may be marked with <PC>, and if the material is ABS resin, with <ABS>. Note that the material identification marking can be attached using various methods. For example, a method of engraving (printing) using laser marking or the like may be used, or such marking may be attached in advance (molded as a single unit) when the case is molded.

In addition, the above-mentioned base body and cover body may both be marked with a material-specific indication so that their respective materials can be recognized even after they are separated, or since they are basically made of the same material, the material-specific indication may be marked on at least one of the components. Note that it is desirable to position the specific material indication in a position that does not overlap with the unique information display section 541 so as not to impede the visibility of the rewritable film 543.

(Explanatory information on the main control board case)
As described above, the role ratio monitor 483 is provided on the main control board 411, but it is also possible to provide other indicators such as 7-segment LEDs and lamps (for example, LEDs for checking operation, which will be described later). When multiple such indicators are provided, it may be difficult to understand the function and role of each indicator (such as what is displayed by the indicator) from the outside. Therefore, in order to enable an operator (for example, an attendant at an amusement arcade) to understand the function and role of the indicator at a glance, a display (explanatory information) that can identify the type of indicator provided on the main control board 411 may be attached to a position corresponding to the target indicator on the main control board case 460. This can have the effect of improving the convenience of the operator.

For example, suppose that the main control board 411 is provided with a role ratio monitor 483, a status indicator for displaying the status of the main control board 411, and a setting indicator for displaying the set setting value. In this case, the explanatory information "role ratio monitor" is added to an arbitrary position on the main control board case 460 that is near the role ratio monitor 483 in a front view, the explanatory information "status display" is added to an arbitrary position on the main control board case 460 that is near the status indicator in a front view, and the explanatory information "setting" is added to an arbitrary position on the main control board case 460 that is near the setting indicator in a front view. Note that, like the above-mentioned specific material display, the explanatory information can also be added using various methods. It is also desirable to provide the explanatory information at a position that does not overlap with the unique information display unit 541 so as not to interfere with the visibility of the rewritable film 543.

(Operation check LED and its explanation)
As described above, operation check LEDs for making it possible to check various operation statuses related to the game (whether the operation is normal or not) may be provided on the main control board 411. The operation check LEDs are, for example, configured as a group of multiple LEDs each corresponding to various operation parts or various sensors, and light up individually when the corresponding operation part is being operated or the corresponding sensor is in the ON state (and turn off when the corresponding operation part is not being operated or the corresponding sensor is not in the ON state), making it possible to check each operation status.

For example, when the start lever 7 is being operated (i.e., when the start switch 431 is on), a corresponding LED lights up, but when the start lever 7 is not being operated (i.e., when the start switch 431 is off), that LED goes out. Note that other operating sections connected to the main control board 411, such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, and the settlement button 9, are also configured in the same way, and the corresponding LED lights up if the corresponding section is being operated, and goes out if the corresponding section is not being operated.

For example, when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 is passing through the interior (i.e., when the medal sensor 31S (see FIG. 3 as an example here) is on), a corresponding LED is lit, but when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 is not passing through the interior (i.e., when the medal sensor 31S is off), that LED is turned off. Note that other sensors connected to the main control board 411, such as the chute sensor (a sensor on the route that discharges medals into the medal tray 12 when a medal is not accepted), the sensor of the door opening/closing switch 436 (which is on when the door is closed and off when the door is open), and the error release sensor (a sensor that can detect a reset operation in the locking mechanism 15), are configured in the same way, and when the sensor is on, the corresponding LED is lit, and when the sensor is off, the corresponding LED is turned off.

As described above, it is also possible to provide explanatory information on each LED in the operation check LED on the main control board case 460, but if there are a large number of LEDs, it may be difficult to secure sufficient space, or the visibility of the main control board 411 may be significantly reduced. Therefore, an LED correspondence table showing which operation unit or sensor each LED corresponds to may be provided near the mounting position of the main control board case 460 (or may be any position within the housing as long as the correspondence can be confirmed). The LED correspondence table may be configured as a sticker and attached to any position. In this case, the sticker may be attached to the main control board case 460. However, in this case, it is preferable to attach it to a position that does not overlap with the unique information display unit 541 so as not to interfere with the visibility of the rewritable film 543 (or to make the sticker of the LED correspondence table a shape that does not interfere with the visibility of the unique information display unit 541).

(Management information on the main control board case)
Management information for managing main control board 411 and main control board case 460 (for example, information different from the above-mentioned unique information and enabling the manufacturer to identify the product or parts) may be attached to main control board case 460. In this case, the management information may be configured as, for example, a barcode or QR code (registered trademark), and a sticker with such a code printed thereon may be attached to main control board case 460. In this case, it is preferable that the management information be attached at a position that does not overlap unique information display section 541 so as not to impede at least the visibility of rewritable film 543 (or that the management information sticker has a shape that does not impede the visibility of unique information display section 541).

[10-6. Gaming machine using main control board specifications according to another example]
In this example, by using the above-mentioned specifications regarding the test points (TP), it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example. Note that each configuration regarding the test points (TP) described as the specifications of the main control board 411 in this example can also be applied to control boards other than the main control board 411 (for example, the sub-control board 412, the door relay board 413, or the sub-relay board 414, etc.) within the scope of the invention.

For example, the main control board 411, which is equipped with at least the main control unit 411a that controls the progress of the game, is equipped with a number of surface-mounted components (e.g., IC3 to IC6) whose terminals are soldered to the front side of the board, and a number of dip-mounted components (e.g., resistors and capacitors as dip components) whose terminals are inserted from the front side of the board into through holes 411g that penetrate the board and whose terminals are soldered to the back side of the board, and when a wiring is used to connect between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component, a test point (TP) connected to the wiring is provided.

For example, a test point (TP) is provided in an amusement machine when the terminal pitch of each surface-mounted component connected by wiring is equal to or smaller than a specific size (e.g., 1.27 mm).

For example, a test point (TP) is a gaming machine that is provided when no dip-mounted component is connected to the wiring between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component.

Also, for example, this is an amusement machine in which the test point (TP) is not provided on the back side (e.g., the non-component mounting surface) of the main control board 411.

For example, a dip-mounted component is an amusement machine that includes a resistor and a capacitor whose terminals are formed by a pair of lead wires.

Also, for example, in an amusement machine, all surface-mounted components have a surface area exceeding a predetermined size (e.g., 6 mm2).

In addition, for example, the main control board 411 is a gaming machine equipped with a medal count control unit 411b that controls the management of gaming value.

In addition, for example, the main control microprocessor 470 included in the main control unit 411a and the medal count control microprocessor 480 included in the medal count control unit 411b are of the same configuration in this gaming machine.

Also, for example, a test point (TP) is a gaming machine that is connected to the wiring between a terminal of one surface mount component (e.g., IC3 or IC4) and a terminal of another surface mount component (e.g., IC5 or IC6) mounted on the connection path between the main control unit 411a and the medal count control unit 411b.

For example, the main control board 411 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 483 capable of displaying at least predetermined ratio information related to the game, and the role ratio monitor 483 is a gaming machine connected to the medal count control unit 411b.

For example, the main control board 411 is equipped with a medal count clear switch 444 that can initialize information related to the game value managed by the medal count control unit 411b, and the medal count clear switch 444 is connected to the medal count control unit 411b, and is configured to be accessible from outside the main control board case 460 when the main control board 411 is housed in the case.

In addition, in this example, by using the specifications for the rewritable film 543 described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example. Note that each configuration for the rewritable film 543 described in this example as the specifications for the main control board 411 can also be applied to control boards other than the main control board 411 (for example, the sub-control board 412, the door relay board 413, or the sub-relay board 414, etc.) within the scope of the purpose of the invention.

For example, the main control board 411 is installed inside the pachislot machine 401 while being housed in a transparent main control board case 460, and a unique information display unit 541 for displaying board management information is provided in a position where it can be seen in this state, and the unique information display unit 541 is an amusement machine that includes a rewritable film 543, which is a rewritable thermal film.

For example, the main control board 411 has a board body 544 on whose surface an electrically conductive wiring pattern is arranged, and a resist layer 545 covering the surface of the board body, the resist layer 545 being transparent or translucent, and the rewritable film 543 being arranged between the board body 544 and the resist layer 545 in the unique information display section 541, making it possible to rewrite board management information from outside the resist layer 545.

In addition, for example, the main control board 411 has a surface on which the unique information display unit 541 is provided (e.g., the surface on which the resist layer 545a is formed) as a component mounting surface, and multiple electronic components can be mounted on this component mounting surface, and on the component mounting surface other than the unique information display unit 541, component information for identifying the mounted electronic components is printed on the surface of the resist layer 545a, making this an amusement machine.

In addition, for example, in the unique information display unit 541, the board body 544 does not have a wiring pattern (e.g., wiring patterns 411c and 411d) arranged thereon.

In addition, for example, in the unique information display section 541, a recess 546 corresponding to the thickness of the rewritable film 543 is formed in the substrate body 544 of the gaming machine.

For example, in the unique information display section 541, a transparent plate 547 is attached to the outside of the resist layer 545a and is fixed to the board body 545 by a fixing member (e.g., a locking pin 548), and the rewritable film 543 is a gaming machine configured so that the board management information can be rewritten from the outside of the transparent plate 547.

In addition, for example, the gaming machine has a gap at least partially between the resist layer 545a and the transparent plate 547.

In addition, for example, in the unique information display section 541, a recess 546 corresponding to the thickness of the rewritable film 543 is formed in the board body 544, and a transparent plate 547 fixed to the board body 545 by a fixing member (e.g., a locking pin 548) is attached to the outside of the resist layer 545a in the unique information display section 541, and the rewritable film 543 is configured so that the board management information can be rewritten from the outside of the transparent plate 547.

Also, for example, the transparent plate 547 is an amusement machine in which at least a portion of its back side is in close contact with the resist layer 545a.

Also, for example, in the unique information display unit 541, the board body 544 has a plurality of through holes (e.g., through holes 549) that penetrate between the surface on which the unique information display unit 541 is provided (e.g., the component mounting surface) and the surface on which the unique information display unit 541 is not provided (e.g., the component non-mounting surface), and the transparent plate 547 has locking holes at positions corresponding to the through holes. The fixing member is a locking pin 548 having a body portion that is inserted into the locking hole and the through hole and a head portion that is locked into the locking hole, and the body portion of the locking pin 548 is inserted into the locking hole and the through hole so that the head portion of the locking pin 548 is locked into the locking hole, and the transparent plate 547 is fixed to the board body 544 by soldering the end of the body portion that protrudes from the surface on which the unique information display unit 541 is not provided.

In addition, for example, the through hole formed in the substrate body 544 is formed as a through hole 549 through which electricity can pass.

[10-7. Summary of the invention relating to the gaming machine using the main control board specifications according to the other examples (Appendix)]
As described above, a gaming machine using the specifications of the main control board according to another example can be provided with a gaming machine having the following configuration.

(First invention group)
In conventional gaming machines, a system has been proposed in which surface-mounted components are used in the main control device (main control board) (see, for example, JP 2021-90627 A).

However, it is desirable for such control boards to be configured so that they can be inspected using a measuring device such as a digital oscilloscope, for the purpose of verifying the operation of the circuitry and identifying faulty locations. In particular, the main control board of a gaming machine performs the main control of the game, and there is an extremely high need for this in order to ensure the fairness and reliability of the game.

However, compared to dip-mounted components, surface-mounted components often have thinner terminals and narrower spacing between terminals. This means that there is a risk that such testing may not be performed properly. However, surface-mounted components are often easier to obtain and less expensive than dip-mounted components. From this perspective, if a main control board is designed without using surface-mounted components, the manufacturing costs will increase.

The present invention aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration:

(1) The gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine including a main control board (e.g., a main control board 411) on which a main control unit (e.g., a main control unit 411a) that controls at least the progress of a game is mounted,
The main control board is mounted with a plurality of surface mount components having terminals soldered to a front surface side of the board, and a plurality of dip mount components having terminals inserted from the front surface side of the board into through holes penetrating the board and having terminals soldered to a rear surface side of the board;
When a terminal of one of the surface mount components is connected to a terminal of another of the surface mount components by a wiring, a test pattern (for example, a test point) is provided that is connected to the wiring.
According to this gaming machine, surface-mounted components are used for at least some of the electronic components on the main control board, and test patterns are provided in the connection paths between the surface-mounted components. This makes it possible to perform appropriate inspections of areas that are difficult to access using a measuring device probe, for example, and thus makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs without compromising the fairness and reliability of the game.

(2) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The test pattern is provided when the terminal pitch of each of the surface mount components connected by wiring is equal to or smaller than a specific size (for example, 1.27 mm).
According to this gaming machine, when the terminal pitch of a surface mounted component exceeds a specific size, it is determined that inspection is possible without using a test pattern, and when this is equal to or below the specific size, this is one of the conditions (constraints) for providing a test pattern. This allows for smooth circuit design and also eliminates the need to provide unnecessary test patterns, further reducing manufacturing costs.

(3) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The test pattern is provided when the dip-mounted component is not connected to a wiring between a terminal of one of the surface mount components and a terminal of another of the surface mount components.
According to this gaming machine, even if the connection path is between surface mounted components, it can be inspected without using a test pattern if a dip mounted component is connected there, and the condition (constraint) for providing a test pattern is set to be when no dip mounted component is connected there. This expands the range of options available when designing circuits, and also eliminates the need to provide unnecessary test patterns, further reducing manufacturing costs.

(4) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The test pattern is not provided on the back side of the main control board.
With this gaming machine, while test patterns are provided to ensure the fairness and reliability of the game, when inspecting using a measuring device, for example, it is only necessary to check the minimum number of necessary locations, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and improving the convenience of inspection.

(5) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The dip-mounted components are characterized in that they include resistors and capacitors whose terminals are formed by a pair of lead wires.
According to this gaming machine, more appropriate electronic components can be implemented depending on various factors such as the application and strength, including whether or not to provide a test pattern, thereby making it possible to reduce manufacturing costs while further improving the fairness and reliability of the game.

(6) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The surface mount components are characterized in that their surface areas exceed a predetermined size (for example, 6 mm2).
According to this gaming machine, even when surface-mounted components are used, those that are too small are not used, which improves the convenience of inspection and makes it easier to discover defects or fraudulent activity, for example. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs while further enhancing the fairness and reliability of games.

(7) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The main control board is characterized by being equipped with a game value control unit (e.g., medal count control unit 411b) that controls management of game value.
According to this gaming machine, the main control board is configured to not only control the progress of the game but also to manage the game value, which means, for example, that there is no need to provide a separate board and case for the game value control unit.In addition, strict management of the main control board makes it easier to prevent fraudulent activity, thereby reducing manufacturing costs while further improving the fairness and reliability of the game.

(8) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
The main control microprocessor (e.g., main control microprocessor 470) included in the main control unit and the game value control microprocessor (e.g., medal count control microprocessor 480) included in the game value control unit are characterized by having the same configuration.
With this gaming machine, even if the main control board is equipped with multiple microprocessors with different control contents, the circuit design, program design, etc. can be easily standardized and these can be easily obtained at low cost, further reducing manufacturing costs.

(9) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
The test pattern is characterized in that it is connected to wiring between a terminal of one of the surface mount components and a terminal of another of the surface mount components mounted on the connection path between the main control unit and the game value control unit.
According to this gaming machine, the connection path between the main control unit and the gaming value control unit, which work together to perform the main control of the game, is determined to be particularly important, and test patterns are provided for the surface-mounted components on that path, thereby further improving the fairness and reliability of the game.

(10) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
The main control board is equipped with a display device (e.g., a role ratio monitor 483) capable of displaying at least predetermined ratio information related to the game,
The display device is connected to the gaming value control unit.
According to this gaming machine, the display device capable of displaying specified ratio information is controlled by the gaming value control unit, thereby reducing the control load on the main control unit, thereby further improving the fairness and reliability of the game.

(11) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
The main control board is equipped with an initialization switch (e.g., a medal count clear switch 444) capable of initializing information regarding the game value managed by the game value control unit,
The initialization switch is connected to the game value control unit and is configured to be accessible from outside the case when the main control board is housed in the case.
According to this gaming machine, the initialization switch capable of initializing information related to the gaming value is controlled by the gaming value control unit, so that the control load of the main control unit can be reduced, and the fairness and reliability of the game can be improved. Also, since only the information related to the gaming value can be initialized without initializing the entire gaming machine, the convenience of its operation can be improved.

The gaming machine with the above configuration can reduce manufacturing costs.

(Second invention group)
Conventionally, the control board for controlling the gaming operation in a gaming machine is installed inside a transparent board case while being housed therein from the standpoint of preventing fraud, etc., and it is required that unique identification information (board management information) including, for example, the name of the manufacturer of the gaming machine and its model name be displayed so that the control board can be easily identified in this state.

In this type of gaming machine, a system has been proposed in which the main body of the control board is provided with multiple identification information display sections with different identification information printed on them, and the identification information display sections other than the required ones can be selectively separated, making it possible to display only the identification information appropriate to the mode of use (see, for example, JP 2006-68112 A). According to the gaming machine shown in JP 2006-68112 A, the same control board can be used between different models, which increases its versatility and reduces manufacturing costs.

In recent years, in order to further reduce manufacturing costs and to be environmentally conscious, there has been a demand to collect gaming machines that have been installed in gaming establishments and reuse components that are in good working order in new gaming machines. However, as mentioned above, the control board is required to display unique identification information, and the reality is that such control boards are difficult to reuse. For example, in the gaming machine shown in JP 2006-68112 A, even if there is room for selection at the time of initial shipment, the same problem arises after the selected identification information is displayed and the machine is shipped. In other words, there is a demand for a way to easily change the identification information already displayed on the control board.

The present invention aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration:

(1) The gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine equipped with a main control board (e.g., a main control board 411) that controls the progress of a game,
The main control board is mounted inside the gaming machine in a state where it is housed in a transparent board case (e.g., a main control board case 460), and a unique information display unit (e.g., a unique information display unit 541) for displaying unique information (e.g., board management information) is provided at a position where it can be seen in that state.
The unique information display section is characterized by including a rewritable thermosensitive film (for example, rewritable film 543).
According to this gaming machine, the unique information display section for displaying the unique information is composed of a rewritable thermal film, so that, for example, even if one piece of unique information is already displayed on the main control board, it is possible to rewrite it with different unique information and reuse it without making any changes to the configuration of the main control board itself, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

(2) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The main control board has a board body (e.g., board body 544) on whose surface a conductive wiring pattern is arranged, and an insulating layer (e.g., resist layer 545) covering the surface of the board body,
The insulating layer is configured to be transparent or semi-transparent;
The thermal film is disposed between the substrate body and the insulating layer in the unique information display portion, and is configured so that the unique information can be rewritten from outside the insulating layer.
According to this gaming machine, a thermal film is placed between the board body and the insulating layer, and the unique information can be rewritten from outside the insulating layer. This means that while retaining the advantage of being able to rewrite the unique information, the board itself and the thermal film portion can be adequately protected, resulting in a board configuration that is more reliable while reducing manufacturing costs.

(3) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The main control board has a surface on which the unique information display unit is provided (for example, a surface on which a resist layer 545a is formed) as a component mounting surface, and a plurality of electronic components can be mounted on the component mounting surface;
The present invention is characterized in that, in the component mounting surface other than the unique information display portion, component information for identifying the mounted electronic component is printed on the surface of the insulating layer.
According to this gaming machine, multiple electronic components are mounted on the component mounting surface other than the unique information display section, and component information that can identify these electronic components is printed on the insulating layer. As a result, not only the unique information but also the board configuration itself can be easily viewed, thereby improving visibility while reducing manufacturing costs.

(4) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The wiring pattern is not disposed on the substrate body in the specific information display portion.
According to this gaming machine, for example, the visibility of the wiring pattern is not hindered by the thermal film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced while the visibility can be improved. Also, for example, even when the unique information is rewritten, the wiring pattern is not affected, so that the board configuration can be made more reliable.

(5) The gaming machine of the present invention is
The unique information display portion is characterized in that a recess (for example, recess 546) corresponding to the thickness of the thermal film is formed in the substrate body.
According to this gaming machine, even when a thermal film is placed between the substrate body and the insulating layer, it is possible to prevent any effect on the substrate configuration itself, such as, for example, the substrate itself becoming thicker or the insulating layer becoming more prone to peeling off. Furthermore, since the material for the insulating layer can be selected without considering the thermal film, it is possible to achieve a substrate configuration that is more reliable while reducing manufacturing costs.

(6) The gaming machine of the present invention is
A transparent plate (e.g., a transparent plate 547) is attached to the outside of the insulating layer in the unique information display portion and is fixed to the substrate body by a fixing member (e.g., a locking pin 548).
The thermal film is characterized in that the unique information is rewritable from the outside of the transparent plate.
According to this gaming machine, the portion where the thermal film is arranged is further protected by a transparent plate, and the unique information can still be rewritten in this state. As a result, while maintaining the advantage of being able to rewrite the unique information, the thermal film portion can be more securely protected, resulting in a board configuration that is more reliable while reducing manufacturing costs.

(7) The gaming machine of the present invention is
A gap is provided at least partially between the insulating layer and the transparent plate.
With this gaming machine, the insulating layer located below the transparent plate is less susceptible to the effects of the transparent plate, so that the thermal film portion is more securely protected while also protecting the original board configuration, thereby enabling a more reliable board configuration while reducing manufacturing costs.

(8) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
In the unique information display portion, a recess (e.g., a recess 546) corresponding to the thickness of the thermal film is formed in the substrate body,
A transparent plate (e.g., a transparent plate 547) is attached to the outside of the insulating layer in the unique information display portion and is fixed to the substrate body by a fixing member (e.g., a locking pin 548).
The thermal film is characterized in that the unique information is rewritable from the outside of the transparent plate.
According to this gaming machine, even if a thermal film is placed between the main board and the insulating layer, it is possible to prevent any effect on the board configuration itself, such as the board itself becoming thicker or the insulating layer becoming more likely to peel off, and the material of the insulating layer can be selected without considering the thermal film. Furthermore, since the part where the thermal film is placed is further protected by a transparent plate and the unique information can be rewritten even in this state, the thermal film part can be more firmly protected while maintaining the advantage that the unique information can be rewritten. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a board configuration with higher reliability while reducing the manufacturing cost.

(9) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
The transparent plate is characterized in that at least a portion of its rear surface is in close contact with the insulating layer.
With this gaming machine, not only can the insulating layer and transparent plate provide more solid protection for the thermal film portion, but the transparent plate also prevents the insulating layer from becoming easily peeled off, resulting in a more reliable board configuration while reducing manufacturing costs.

(10) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
In the unique information display portion, a plurality of through holes (e.g., through holes 549) are formed in the substrate body, penetrating between a surface on which the unique information display portion is provided and a surface on which the unique information display portion is not provided,
The transparent plate is formed with a locking hole at a position corresponding to the through hole,
the fixing member is a pin member having a body portion inserted into the locking hole and the through hole and a head portion locked in the locking hole,
The transparent plate is fixed to the substrate body by inserting the body part into the locking hole and the through hole so that the head part is locked in the locking hole, and soldering the end part of the body part that protrudes onto a surface on which the unique information display part is not provided.
With this gaming machine, the transparent plate that protects the thermal film portion can be integrated as one component of the main control board, not only providing more robust protection for the thermal film portion, but also allowing it to be applied for as a single component in specified tests for gaming machines (type certification tests), for example, thereby increasing convenience in such situations while also reducing manufacturing costs.

(11) The gaming machine of the present invention comprises:
The through hole is characterized in that it is formed as a through hole through which electricity can pass.
According to this gaming machine, the through hole for fixing the transparent plate to the main board body also functions as a through hole, which not only provides more robust protection for the thermal film portion but also improves the stability of the board itself, resulting in a more reliable board configuration while reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine with the above configuration can reduce manufacturing costs.

[11. Other examples of expansion related to gameplay, etc.]
As described above, in this embodiment, the gameplay is described by exemplifying the specifications and functions of the first gaming machine, but the specifications and functions of the gameplay are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example is described, although it is only an example. Note that the various specifications and functions described in this section can be applied in part or in whole to other gaming machines described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be the invention according to this embodiment.

(AT granting one-hit suppression specification in one game)
As described above, in this embodiment, a payout number limiter can be installed that can control the forcible termination of the advantageous zone and transition to a non-advantageous zone (terminating the AT state even if the playing period of the AT state remains) when the value indicating the number of medals paid out during the advantageous zone (here, the difference in the number of medals, which is the net increase) reaches a specified value (for example, "2400" medals), and the payout number limiter can be configured to set the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous zone as the lowest point (starting point), and count the positive amount from the most recent lowest point (i.e., if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.).

In this configuration, for example, if the counted value is minus 5000 at the start of the AT state, the payout limiter will not operate until the difference exceeds "5000 + 2400" (i.e., becomes "7401" or more). For this reason, assuming that no limiters other than the payout limiter are installed, if the start of the AT state is decided in such a situation, and, for example, it is decided that the AT state will continue until the end of the advantageous zone (including the mode of continuing intermittently), the player will in effect be granted a privilege of 7400 AT difference. At this time, it is possible to make it a specification that appeals to a large amount of winning by producing, for example, "AT difference of 7400 sheets GET". However, if it is made possible to win too many medals with the trigger of one game, there is a risk that gambling tendency will not be appropriately suppressed.

Therefore, it is desirable to design the AT expected value (number of difference) that can be granted in the AT granting process in one game (including not only the process that decides to grant the AT state (first hit) but also the process that decides to extend the AT state (addition)) so as not to exceed a specific value (suppressing the granting of an AT difference number that exceeds a specific value in a so-called "one shot"). For example, it is desirable to design the AT expected value that can be granted in the AT granting process in one game to be 3000 or less. Note that the value of the specific value is merely an example, and can be set to any value taking into account the payout rate, the degree of gambling, etc. For example, it may be set to 2400, the same as the specified value, or any other value that exceeds the specified value (3600 or 4800). In addition, various modes of granting can be adopted.

For example, when the AT state is managed by the difference in number of coins (when managing the difference in number of coins), an AT difference of more than 3000 coins can be prevented from being awarded. When the AT state is managed by the number of games (when managing the number of games), the expected value of the net increase in number of coins per game is taken into consideration, and if this is, for example, 3 coins per game, an AT game number of more than 1000 games can be prevented from being awarded. Also, when the AT state is managed by the number of sets (when managing the number of sets), the number of games per set is also taken into consideration, and if this is, for example, 100 games per set (as mentioned above, the expected value of the net increase in number of coins per game is 3 coins), an AT game number of more than 10 sets can be prevented from being awarded.

This technical idea can be summarized as follows, for example.
In a gaming machine equipped with a difference limiter (e.g., a payout limiter) that ends a favorable zone when a gaming value increases beyond a specified value (e.g., 2,400 coins) starting from the start of the favorable zone,
Even if the number of reductions in game value (e.g., the number of coins absorbed from the start of the advantageous zone (the number of coins lost by the player)) counted by a difference counter (e.g., a favorable zone payout counter) used in the difference limiter is a predetermined value (e.g., 5,000 coins), the expected value of the game value to be awarded during the AT state in the AT awarding process of one game is configured to be equal to or less than a specific value (e.g., 3,000 coins) that is less than the predetermined value,
In this gaming machine, the value obtained by adding the predetermined value and the specified value (for example, 7,400 coins) may exceed the specific value.
According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling.

(Restrictions on expression related to one-hit suppression specifications)
As mentioned above, from the viewpoint of suppressing gambling, it is desirable that the AT expected value (here, an example of the AT difference in sheets) awarded in one game does not exceed a specific value (here, an example of 3,000 sheets), and from the same viewpoint, it is also desirable to avoid an effect that notifies the player that an AT difference in sheets exceeding 3,000 sheets has been awarded in one game (for example, an effect such as the above-mentioned "GET AT difference in sheets of 7,400 sheets"; hereinafter referred to as a "one-hit effect").

However, even under such restrictions, it is possible that a notification may be made that gives the impression that an AT difference of more than 3,000 coins has been awarded in one game, even if the coins have not actually been awarded in one game (for example, they have been awarded as a cumulative result over several games). However, if such a notification could lead a player to mistakenly believe that an AT difference of more than 3,000 coins has been awarded in one game, then such a notification may constitute a one-hit effect. Therefore, in order for the above-mentioned restrictions to function properly (to appropriately suppress gambling), it is desirable to also restrict (not execute) presentation expressions that may constitute such one-hit effects.

Here, an example of a presentation expression that may correspond to a one-hit presentation is explained below. Here, for example, there is a period of three games during which the AT difference is awarded, and the AT difference is awarded in each of the first to third games (for example, an AT difference of 1200 is awarded in each game), and in the third game, it is announced that an AT difference of more than 3000 (for example, 3600) has been awarded.

In the first presentation example, in the first and second games, only the fact that the player is in the awarding period (or only that the AT difference has been awarded) is notified, and in the third game, after a similar notification, it is notified that the AT difference awarded during the awarding period was 3600 (a result notification is made). In this case, since no specific notification of the AT difference awarded is made except in the result notification, when looking at the final result notification, there is a risk that the player will mistakenly believe that an AT difference of 3600 has been awarded in one shot. Therefore, since the result notification in this case may constitute a one-shot presentation, it is desirable to limit such presentation expressions.

In addition, even if the presentation expression is similar, for example, in the above result notification, if a specific notification is given about the AT difference awarded in each game during the awarding period, such as "1st game: plus 1200 coins, 2nd game: plus 1200 coins, 3rd game: plus 1200 coins, total: plus 3600 coins," and the presentation expression can be fully recognized as the result notification of that game merely showing the cumulative total, then this is not considered to be a one-hit presentation and does not need to be restricted.

In the second presentation example, in the first and second games, it is notified (a progress notification is made) that an AT difference of 1,200 sheets has been awarded in each game, and in the third game, after a similar progress notification is made, it is notified (a result notification is made) that the AT difference awarded during the award period was 3,600 sheets. In this case, because the progress notification specifically notifies the player of the awarded AT difference, it is thought that there is no risk of the player mistakingly believing that an AT difference of 3,600 sheets has been awarded in one shot, even when looking at the final result notification. Therefore, it is thought that there is no need to restrict such presentation.

As shown in the second presentation example, for example, after announcing in each game that the AT-related bonus awarded in each game is less than a specific amount (for example, an AT difference of 1200 coins, which is a value of less than 3000 coins for the AT expected value), announcing that the total amount of bonuses in a series of added periods (awarding periods) will exceed a specific amount (for example, displaying "GET TOTAL 3600 coins, which exceeds the AT expected value of 3000 coins") is performed, this has the effect of preventing the player from mistakenly believing that a bonus exceeding a specific amount has been awarded in one game, appropriately suppressing excessive gambling, while allowing the player to properly understand the amount of bonuses that have been generated. Note that this also applies to the other examples of presentation that have been described in this section as not requiring any restrictions.

For example, in the above-mentioned progress notification, even if there is no specific notification of the AT difference number that has been granted, if a notification that can suggest that the AT difference number that has been granted is gradually increasing (for example, the number of jewels is added, or the meter increases, etc.) is made, and the result notification is made based on that (for example, jewels acquired in different unit games are broken one by one and the AT difference number is added, or numbers representing the AT difference number are displayed in sequence on the meter scale, etc.), then this is not likely to constitute a one-hit effect, and it is thought that there is no need to restrict it.

(AT application performance change specification based on the number of sheets sucked)
When the payout number limiter is configured and installed as described above, for example, when the counted value is minus 1000 at the start of the AT state (when the number of coins absorbed (number of coins lost by the player) is 1000), the payout number limiter will not operate until the difference in the number of coins exceeds "1000 coins + 2400 coins" (i.e., becomes "3401" coins or more). Also, for example, when the counted value is minus 5000 at the start of the AT state (when the number of coins absorbed is 5000), the payout number limiter will not operate until the difference in the number of coins exceeds "5000 coins + 2400 coins" (i.e., becomes "7401" coins or more).

In other words, assuming that no limiters other than the payout number limiter are installed, the more coins are absorbed at the start of the AT state (when the negative value of the count is greater), the further away the payout number limiter will be activated, and the more game value can be acquired during the same favorable zone. Therefore, the AT granting performance may be changed according to the number of coins absorbed. In addition to the payout number limiter, even if the gaming machine is equipped with a game number limiter (for example, one that activates the limiter after 3000 or 4000 games) that ends the favorable zone depending on the number of games that have passed since the start of the favorable zone, the AT granting performance may be changed according to the number of coins absorbed. This is because, when the number of coins absorbed per game in the AT state and the number of games remaining until the end of the favorable zone due to the game number limiter are secured to the extent that the AT state is not terminated midway, the more coins absorbed, the further away the payout number limiter will be activated for the player.

For example, when the number of absorbed sheets is relatively large, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased such that (a) the probability of winning the AT is higher, and (b) the degree of advantage in the AT (for example, the expected value of acquisition and the expected value of continuation) is higher than when the number of absorbed sheets is relatively small. In the above example, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased when the number of absorbed sheets is 5,000 sheets compared to when the number of absorbed sheets is 1,000 sheets. In addition, various modes can be adopted to increase the degree of advantage. For example, only (a) can be adopted, or only (b) can be adopted. In addition, both (a) and (b) can be adopted. In addition, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased when the number of absorbed sheets is relatively small compared to when the number of absorbed sheets is relatively large, thereby preventing the number of absorbed sheets from becoming extremely large.

In addition, a special AT state may be set up that can only be entered when a certain number of coins are sucked in. For example, a special AT state with a 3,000 coins per hit can only be entered when 600 coins or more are sucked in.

In addition, when changing the AT granting performance according to the number of absorbed sheets, for example, different AT lottery tables may be referenced according to the threshold (range) of the number of absorbed sheets, such as 0 to 500 sheets, 501 to 1000 sheets, 1001 to 2000 sheets, 2001 to 3000 sheets, and 3000 sheets or more, to change the degree of advantage of the AT granting process. In this case, even when the count value starting from the start of the advantageous zone is positive (the number of absorbed sheets is negative on the contrary), different AT lottery tables (for example, different tables for the number of net increases of 0 to 500 sheets, 501 to 1000 sheets, and 1001 to 2400 sheets) may be referenced according to the threshold (range) of the net increase in the number of sheets (or the number of absorbed sheets that is a negative value) to change the degree of advantage of the AT granting process. In this case, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be higher when the number of net increases is relatively small than when the number of net increases is relatively large.

Furthermore, the method of changing the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing a different AT lottery table, a variable (which may be the lottery value itself, or a value for performing a specified calculation on a reference lottery value, for example) corresponding to the number of coins sucked in (or the number of coins increased) may be specified, and the AT granting process may be performed by referring to this value, thereby changing the AT granting performance. The method of the AT granting process itself is arbitrary, and methods other than those mentioned above may also be adopted as long as they change the AT granting performance according to the sucking situation and enable a variety of gameplay features to be realized.

(Performance related to the change in AT grant performance based on the number of sheets sucked in)
At any time during the favorable zone (for example, at regular intervals in a non-AT state, when a CZ fails in a CZ state, when a non-AT transition is indicated in a continuous presentation, when the AT state ends, when the threshold (range) of the above-mentioned number of coins to be absorbed changes, etc.), a presentation that can suggest or notify the current number of coins to be absorbed may be executed. Note that this presentation may definitively notify the current number of coins to be absorbed (including the range, or how many coins or more (or less) it is), or it may not definitively notify but make it possible to predict the current number of coins to be absorbed based on the frequency of appearance or the manner in which it appears.

If such a presentation could be implemented, even if the player stayed in the non-AT state for a long time, if it was suggested or notified that the number of coins absorbed was large, it would be possible to predict that the AT granting performance would improve, which would have the effect of increasing motivation and anticipation to play without reducing interest in the game. On the other hand, if it was suggested or notified that the number of coins absorbed was small, it would be possible to give the player the option of quitting the game, which would have the effect of preventing the player from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, from the viewpoint of improving playability, in the above-mentioned presentation, instead of or in addition to the number of coins absorbed, the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone (stay period) may be suggested or notified. Also, the number of games that were in a non-AT state during the advantageous zone (non-AT period), or the number of games that were in an AT state during the advantageous zone (AT period) may be suggested or notified. In this way, for example, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the current number of coins absorbed while taking into account game data displayed on a data display device installed in the game arcade and game data published by the game arcade on its website.

At any time after the opening of the amusement store (for example, immediately after the opening of the amusement store (the first game, the 100th game, etc.), when the CZ fails in the first CZ state, when the first consecutive effect indicates that the AT will not be transferred to, when the first AT state ends, when the threshold (range) of the number of coins absorbed changes for the first time, etc. It is preferable that this time arrives as early as possible after the opening of the amusement store), a performance that can suggest or notify whether a setting change has been made may be executed. Note that this performance may be one that definitively notifies that a setting change has been made, or, although it is not a definitive notification, it may be one that makes it possible to predict whether a setting change has been made based on the frequency of appearance or the manner in which it appears.

For example, assuming that when a setting change is made, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to a non-advantageous zone, and the number of coins absorbed is also initialized, if such an effect is executed and a setting change is suggested or notified, it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed from the previous day has not been carried over, and if a setting change is not suggested or notified, it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed from the previous day has not been carried over. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the current number of coins absorbed, and it is also possible to provide a game with a rich strategic element. This has the effect of promoting operation. In addition, it is also possible for the gaming establishment to set whether or not such an effect is executed in the hall menu, etc. If such an effect (for example, this is called a "setting fixed suggestion effect") is set to be unexecutable, it has the effect of making it difficult for players to notice the setting change. On the other hand, if the setting-fixed suggestion effect is set to be executable, players can obtain useful information (hints that lead to winning), which gives players the impression that the gaming facility is a good one, which has the effect of attracting more customers.

At a time when the advantageous zone may end (has the potential to end) (for example, when the AT state ends, when 32 games have been played since the end of the AT state, etc.), a presentation may be executed that suggests or notifies the player whether the advantageous zone will end (or has ended). Note that the presentation may definitively notify the player that the advantageous zone will end (or has ended), or, although it is not a definitive notification, it may make it possible to predict whether the advantageous zone will end (or has ended) based on the frequency of appearance or the manner in which it appears.

For example, assuming a specification that does not include the above-mentioned section lamp (status display unit), if such an effect is executed and it is suggested or notified that the advantageous section is ending (or has ended), it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed will not be carried over to the subsequent game, and if it is suggested or notified that the advantageous section has not ended, it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed will be carried over to the subsequent game.

Therefore, if a player stays in a non-AT state for a long time and then finally transitions to an AT state, but this soon ends, if it is suggested or notified that the advantageous period has not ended, it is possible to predict that the AT granting performance is increasing, which has the effect of not reducing interest in the game and increasing motivation and expectations to play. On the other hand, if a player achieves a certain amount of game value in the AT state and it is suggested or notified that the advantageous period is ending (or has ended), it is possible to predict that the AT granting performance will not increase depending on the number of coins absorbed, and in this case the player can be given the option of quitting the game, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming addicted to the game.

As described above, even if the configuration does not include a section lamp (status display unit) controlled by the main side, a sub-side section lamp (sub-side status display unit) controlled by the sub side may be provided in order to perform the above-mentioned effects. The sub-side section lamp may be controlled in the same manner as the section lamp controlled by the main side, such as turning on when moving from a non-favorable section to a favorable section, or when the AT state is first started in the favorable section, and turning off when the favorable section ends and moves to a non-favorable section, or it may be controlled in a different manner. This has the effect of making it unnecessary to have a program related to the control of the section lamp on the main side, and increasing the free space of data on the main side. In addition, by giving appropriate suggestions or notifications to the player regarding their stay in the favorable section, it has the effect of realizing a variety of game characteristics that incorporates guesses about the number of coins absorbed and the reset status of the favorable section.

For example, when the AT state ends, a lottery may be held as to whether or not to turn off the light even if the advantageous zone does not end, and if the lottery is won, the light will be turned off. Alternatively, when the AT state ends, a lottery may be held as to whether or not to leave the light on even if the advantageous zone ends, and if the lottery is won, the light will be left on. In this way, the game play may be made more diverse by making the light behave differently from the main zone lamp that was previously installed. Note that the above-mentioned effects can be performed by various existing performance devices without providing such sub-side zone lamps. In other words, the various effects described in this section can be performed by any performance execution means as long as the player can be appropriately suggested or notified.

(Lamp indicating external signal output)
As described above, in this embodiment, the specifications are such that multiple types of external signals can be output to the outside via an external terminal board (external centralized terminal board 55 shown in Figure 3, or game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 shown in Figure 36). When an external signal is output, it is desirable to make it possible to visually check from the outside whether there are any errors in the external signal output by lighting one of the lamps controlled by the main control board (main control board 71, or main control board 411) as an external signal output lamp.

Therefore, in the case of a configuration in which a section lamp controlled by the main side is provided as in this embodiment, when a signal indicating the AT state is output from the external terminal board, the section lamp may also be used as an external signal output lamp, and the output of the external signal may be made visible by lighting the section lamp. On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which a section lamp (status display unit) controlled by the main side is not provided as described above, a separate external signal output lamp may be provided to make the output of the external signal visible.

In either configuration, the fact that an external signal is being output can be confirmed from the lighting state of a specific lamp, which has the effect of improving convenience when an operator checks whether a signal is being output properly from the gaming machine, and whether the store (e.g., the hall computer) is properly receiving the signal from the gaming machine. For example, if the specific lamp is lit and the hall computer cannot detect an external signal output from the machine, it becomes possible to detect a problem such as an improper connection of the harness related to receiving the external signal (e.g., a harness connecting the gaming machine and the hall computer, or a harness connecting the sandwich of a medalless gaming machine, the communication device, and the hall computer) or an internal break.

(Special stop function that references the number of MY since power-on)
As described above, in this embodiment, when a certain operating condition is met, a stop function can be installed that disables play until the amusement facility manager cancels the operation (e.g., changes the settings) or the RAM is initialized due to an abnormality. In order to appropriately suppress gambling, for example, a special stop function as shown below can also be installed.

The special stop function disables play when the increase in the number of medals from the point when the number of medals has decreased the most since the power was turned on and at the end of each game (called "MY") reaches 19,000 medals (this value can be changed as desired). Note that if the conditions for the special stop function are met while the continuous operation device for the reels or the first type special reels are in operation, the game may be disabled when the operation of the continuous operation device for the reels or the first type special reels ends.

In addition, it is desirable that gaming machines equipped with a special stop function do not have a normal stop function. Here, the normal stop function means a stop function that is set by the gaming establishment in advance to have a stop function, for example, a stop function that makes it impossible to play when the bonus operation ends (used in store operations where medals are settled with one bonus). If both stop functions are available, players will not know which one was activated when the stop occurs, which may cause confusion for the player and lead to trouble between the player and the gaming establishment. Note that the special stop function is not a function for the convenience of the gaming establishment like the normal stop function, but a function to suppress gambling, so it is desirable that the gaming establishment cannot turn off the function. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a special stop function, it is sufficient not to provide an operation means for changing the stop setting, such as an on/off switch for the stop function, inside the cabinet.

It is desirable that MY is calculated for each game between the time when all reels stop and the time when betting becomes possible. When replay is activated, MY should not be updated because there is no change in the difference in the number of coins. In addition, MY should be initialized only when the power is turned on (including when the RAM is abnormal or the settings are changed) so that it can be counted on a business day basis. In addition, the operating state of the special stop function (i.e., the state in which play is not possible) should be initialized (reset) only when the RAM is abnormal or the settings are changed. Here, since game establishments do not usually perform setting changes or power outage recovery operations during business hours, if the special stop function is activated during a business day, the machine will be in an unplayable state until closing time. Therefore, the player will settle the medals and end play on that machine. This has the effect of suppressing gambling, since play can be stopped in the extremely rare case where a large number of medals (19,000 medals in this case) are won.

(Special stop notification state)
When the special stop function is activated, a special stop notification state can be set to inform the player and the gaming establishment that the game cannot be continued. In the special stop notification state, it is desirable to display a display indicating that the special stop function has been activated, such as "The stop function has been activated. Today's game is over." on the performance display unit or the like. By displaying such a display, the reason and the situation of the game being stopped can be easily conveyed to the player and the store staff, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble between the player and the gaming establishment. In addition, since the game cannot be played after the special stop function is activated, the display indicating that the special stop function has been activated can be continued until the power is turned off, and the transition to the demo screen (customer waiting screen) is not performed (the demo state notification is not performed).

In addition, the sound output from the speaker and the light emission from the lamp may be patterned to correspond to the special limit notification state. For example, the speaker may emit a sound saying "The special limit function has been activated" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., about one minute), or the lamp may be set to a predetermined state (off, flashing, etc.) to indicate the end of the game. It is desirable that the sound (sound effect, voice, etc.) that indicates or notifies the activation of the special limit function be emitted at a specific volume (e.g., a relatively large volume such as 90 dB) without being affected by the volume adjustment function. Since the limit is important information for the player, this has the effect of preventing the occurrence of an incident in which the notification sound is too quiet to be heard.

In addition, if a predetermined condition (power saving state transition condition) is met during the operation of the special play stop function, the gaming machine that has become unplayable may be set to a power saving state thereafter. The power saving state is a state in which the brightness of the performance display unit (e.g., the display screen of the liquid crystal display device) is reduced or hidden, the brightness of the light-emitting means (e.g., decorative lamps, waist panel, reel lamps, etc.) is reduced or turned off, and the volume of the speaker is reduced or sound is stopped if there is sound from the speaker. In this way, the power consumption of the unplayable gaming machine can be reduced, which has the effect of reducing costs (savings on electricity bills) for the gaming facility and improving environmental performance. In addition, since it is immediately obvious to customers that the machine is not in a normal state (playable state), it has the effect of avoiding trouble such as a customer who tries to play a machine that has been stopped accidentally inserting cash or medals into the corresponding sand. In addition, the following conditions can be used as the power saving state transition condition.

For example, the activation of the special capping function can be used as a condition for transitioning to a power-saving state. In other words, the power-saving state is entered when the special capping function is activated (strictly speaking, it can also be said that the power-saving state is entered in response to the activation of the special capping state without any particular transition condition). This has the effect of further improving power-saving performance.

In addition, for example, the condition for transitioning to the power-saving state can be that a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes, etc., can be any time that is considered necessary for a player to end play) has passed since the activation of the special end-of-play function. In addition, for example, the condition for transitioning to the power-saving state can be that a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes, etc., can be any time, as above) has passed since a specific condition (e.g., a condition that is considered to be the end of play, such as the end of a player's operation, the end of payouts, or the end of settlement) has been met after the activation of the special end-of-play function. This has the effect of making it difficult for players to have a bad impression, since the machine can be put into the power-saving state after the time that is considered necessary for a player to leave the seat has passed. Note that these conditions for transitioning to the power-saving state are merely examples, and other conditions can also be used as the conditions for transitioning to the power-saving state.

The effect display unit may also display a two-dimensional code for an information service using the player's mobile terminal (e.g., a two-dimensional code for logging out) along with a display indicating that the special stop function has been activated. The two-dimensional code may be automatically displayed on the display screen indicating that the special stop function has been activated, or an operation to call up a user menu (e.g., an operation on a performance button) may be accepted even when the special stop function is activated, and the user menu may be displayed in response to that operation, and the two-dimensional code may be displayed by an operation on the user menu. With such a configuration, the player can retrieve his or her game history even when the game is stopped, which has the effect of maintaining interest and improving convenience.

(External signal output when special stop function is activated)
When the special stop function is activated, a predetermined external signal may be output from the external terminal board. For example, an external signal as a security signal may be output from a predetermined terminal (e.g., a terminal for PIN number 6) for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) or more, so that an external data display, hall computer, etc. may also be able to know that a security-related event has occurred.

(Advance notification of special stoppage state activation)
However, if the special stop state is suddenly activated and the game becomes unplayable, even if the AT difference number remains, the game cannot be continued at that point, so if there is a possibility that the special stop state will be activated suddenly, it may reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, in order to make the player aware in advance that the special stop state will be activated and the game will become unplayable, it is desirable to notify the player in advance before the special stop function is activated.

For example, when the MY counter for the special stop function reaches a specific number (e.g., 18,500 coins), a message such as "500 coins remaining until the special stop function is activated" may be displayed on the display unit to provide advance notice that the special stop state is near. Note that once an advance notice has been started, the advance notice may be configured to continue until the special stop function is activated. In this case, when medals are acquired or consumed, the display of the number of coins remaining until the special stop function is activated is updated, and a state in which the conditions until the special stop function is activated can be maintained that allows the player to recognize the conditions until the special stop function is activated may be maintained. Also, when a bonus is in operation (when a continuous operation device for special features or a first type special feature is in operation), if the special stop function is activated at the end of the operation of the bonus, an advance notice such as "The bonus will stop when it ends" may be provided. This has the effect of making the timing of the stop clear, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

However, if the medal increase period such as AT or bonus ends during the advance notification and the medal decrease period such as normal time starts, and the value of the MY counter falls below 18,500, the advance notification may be terminated (in this case, the condition for terminating the advance notification may be a number different from the condition for starting the advance notification (e.g., MY 18,000). Alternatively, once the advance notification has started, the advance notification may be continued until the special limit function is activated, so that another player (e.g., a player who is considering playing the gaming machine) may be aware that the special limit state is approaching. The latter specification has the effect of suppressing unexpected damage caused by the special limit function even if the player changes. In addition, if the power is cut off during the advance notification, the value of the MY counter is initialized, so that the advance notification will be terminated after the power is restored.

In addition, a similar advance notification may be made for the payout limiter. For example, when the payout limiter counter reaches a specific number (e.g., 2300 coins), a message such as "100 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated" may be displayed on the display to notify the player that the payout limiter is about to be activated. In addition, when both the special limit function and the payout limiter are installed, advance notification may be made for both. For example, when the MY counter reaches a specific number (e.g., 18,500 coins) and the payout limiter counter reaches a specific number (e.g., 2300 coins), a message such as "500 coins remaining until the special limit function is activated" and "100 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated" may be displayed on the display.

In this case, if the game continues, the payout limiter will be activated first and the AT state will end, but the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) by the activation of the payout limiter, so the situation of 400 coins remaining until the special stop function is activated will continue. Therefore, in such a case, the display such as "100 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated" will end, but the display such as "400 coins remaining until the special stop function is activated" may continue. In this case, as described above, if the value of the MY counter falls below 18,500 coins (if the condition for terminating the advance notification is different from the condition for starting the advance notification, when the number of coins that is the condition for terminating the advance notification is reached), the advance notification may be terminated, or once the advance notification has started, it may be continued until the special stop function is activated.

However, there are also situations where it is confirmed that the special stop function will be activated before the payout limiter is activated, such as when there are 50 medals remaining until the special stop function is activated and 100 medals remaining until the payout limiter is activated. Here, it is assumed that the AT state is confirmed to have an increase of at least 50 medals remaining, and both the number of medals acquired that is the advance notification condition for the special stop function to be activated (for example, 18,500 medals or more starting from the lowest point since the power was turned on) and the number of medals acquired that is the advance notification condition for the payout limiter to be activated (for example, 2,300 medals or more starting from the start of the advantageous zone) are met. In such a situation, it is possible to configure the device to display both an advance notification of the special stop function to be activated and an advance notification of the payout limiter to be activated. This has the effect of allowing the player to accurately grasp the situation.

In addition, in such a situation, since the special stop function will be activated first and the payout limiter will not be activated, it is possible to only notify the player of the special stop function activation in advance, and not notify the player of the payout limiter activation in advance. Information about limiters that will not be activated is not necessarily necessary for the player, and considering that notifications such as push order navigation are frequently performed especially in the AT state, it can be said that not increasing the number of displayed items too much allows the player to comfortably enjoy the AT state. In other words, this has the effect of preventing information overload. Note that in machines without a performance display unit, described below, in a situation where both advance notifications of the special stop function activation and advance notifications of the payout limiter activation can be displayed, information about limiters that will not be activated may be hidden.

(Advance notification of special stop state activation on machines not equipped with a performance display unit)
Some gaming machines of this type do not have the above-mentioned display unit, but since the special stop function can be installed even in such machines without the display unit, it is considered necessary to devise some method to perform the above-mentioned advance notification in such gaming machines. An example of such a method will be explained below. Note that, in order to more clearly notify the operation of the special stop state in advance, even gaming machines with the above-mentioned display unit can adopt the following method.

For example, this is a method of using the above-mentioned information display device 14 controlled by the main side as a display means capable of executing advance notification. Specifically, the above-mentioned payout lamp consisting of a two-digit seven-segment LED is used to display the number of medals paid out (payout number), or the above-mentioned instruction monitor (notification lamp) consisting of a two-digit seven-segment LED is used to display information on the stop operation to the player.

When the value of the MY counter above reaches 18,500 sheets, for example, "L5" is displayed on the display means ("L" stands for an identifier, which will be described later). This means that there are 500 sheets remaining before the special limit function is activated. This display continues until the next time the display content is updated. Next, when the value of the MY counter above reaches 18,600 sheets, for example, "L4" is displayed on the display means. This means that there are 400 sheets remaining before the special limit function is activated. This display continues until the next time the display content is updated. In this way, the number of sheets remaining before the special limit function is activated is updated sequentially in increments of 100 sheets (this unit can be changed as desired).

For example, when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,700 sheets, the display means displays "L3", when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,800 sheets, the display means displays "L2", and when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,900 sheets, the display means displays "L1". Note that when the value of the MY counter reaches 19,000 sheets, the special stop function is actually activated.

The payout lamp displays the number of coins to be paid out while the coins are being paid out, so such advance notification cannot be performed at all times, but it is possible to continue the advance notification at least when the player is not playing, so that even if the player changes, it is possible to prevent unexpected losses due to the activation of the special stop function. The instruction monitor (notification lamp) displays instruction information during play when information on a stop operation is notified during the game, so such advance notification cannot be performed at all times, but it is the same as above in that it is possible to continue the advance notification at least when the player is not playing. In other words, it is thought that problems are unlikely to occur with this type of display means configuration.

For example, a display device that is controlled by the sub side and is made up of a three-digit seven-segment LED used to display information about the stop operation to the player is used as a display means capable of issuing advance warnings.

For example, when the MY counter value reaches 18,500, the display means displays "L50", when the MY counter value reaches 18,600, the display means displays "L40", when the MY counter value reaches 18,700, the display means displays "L30", when the MY counter value reaches 18,800, the display means displays "L20", and when the MY counter value reaches 18,900, the display means displays "L10". As with the main display means, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the number of remaining coins until the special limit function is activated is updated in increments of 100 coins, or alternatively, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the actual number of coins dispensed is subtracted and then updated.

When the latter embodiment is adopted, for example, if the value of the MY counter reaches 18,500, the display means may display "500", if there is a net increase of 10 coins in the next game, the display means may display "490", and if there is a net increase of 10 coins in the next game, the display means may display "480".

In addition, in the above display device, when information on a stop operation is notified during the game, the information on the stop operation is displayed during the game, so such advance notification cannot be executed at all times, but it is possible to continue the advance notification at least when not playing, as above. In other words, it is thought that problems are unlikely to occur even with such a display means configuration.

A display device dedicated to advance notification, consisting of a 4-digit 7-segment LED controlled by the sub side, may also be provided. For example, when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,500 coins, the display means may display "L500", when there is a net increase of 10 coins in the next game, the display means may display "L490", when there is a net increase of 10 coins in the next game, the display means may display "L480", and so on, with the display contents being updated sequentially according to the actual number of payouts. Note that since this is a display device dedicated to advance notification, advance notification can be performed at all times, regardless of the game situation.

When the advance notification described above is being given, the special stop function may be activated after the value of the MY counter exceeds 19,000 coins, which is the planned limit, due to the activation of a bonus. For example, this may be the case when a bonus with a net increase of 200 coins is activated when the value of the MY counter is 18,900 coins. In such a case, after the value of the MY counter exceeds 19,000 coins, the display means (here, a display device dedicated to advance notification composed of the above-mentioned 4-digit 7-segment LED) may display, for example, "L000" and maintain this until the bonus ends, or a special display such as "L_BB" may be displayed to indicate that the bonus will end and maintain this until the bonus ends.

This also applies to gaming machines that are equipped with a performance display unit. For example, in a similar situation, once the value of the MY counter exceeds 19,000 coins, the display such as "Game ends when there are XXX coins remaining" may be ended, and a display such as "Game ends when this bonus ends" may be displayed. In this case, the number of coins to be paid out or the number of games played until the bonus ends may also be displayed along with such a display. By displaying such information, it is possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(When giving advance notice of the special stop state activation and the payout limiter activation on a machine without a performance display unit)
As described above, when both the special stop function and the payout limiter are installed, a gaming machine equipped with a performance display unit (e.g., a liquid crystal display device, etc.) can be configured to display both (i) an advance notification of the special stop state being activated, and (ii) an advance notification of the payout limiter being activated on its display screen.

The above is a description of the method for providing advance notification (i) when a machine without a display unit is equipped with a special limit function. However, since machines without a display unit may also be equipped with both a special limit function and a payout limiter, it is considered necessary to provide further advance notification (ii) in that case. An example of such a method is described below. As above, advance notification using the following method may also be provided for gaming machines equipped with a display unit.

First, even if a machine does not have a performance display unit, for example, if it has a first display unit (a 7-segment LED with about 2-4 digits) and a different second display unit (a 7-segment LED with about 2-4 digits), and each is capable of displaying an advance notification, it is possible to simultaneously display (a) and (b), for example, by displaying the advance notification of (a) on the first display unit and the advance notification of (b) on the second display unit. Note that, for example, any of the display means described above can be used as the first display unit and the second display unit, respectively. In this case, the identifiers and display modes can be different, as described below.

On the other hand, in a machine that does not have a display for effects, if it has multiple display units but only one display unit can be used for advance notification, or if it has only one display unit, when both the advance notification conditions for the special win limit function and the advance notification conditions for the payout limiter are met, it will be necessary to devise a way to decide how to display either (a) or (b).

When displaying one of them, for example, as described above, it is possible to configure it so that the advance notification of the one that activates first is given priority. In other words, if the situation is such that the special stop function activates before the payout number limiter, advance notification (a) is given, and if the payout number limiter activates before the special stop function, advance notification (b) is given. This has the effect of being able to notify more appropriate information.

Also, for example, the display contents may be switched from (A) to (B) and from (B) to (A) every time a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, so that both displays can be seen naturally without the player having to operate the device. The switching may occur only while the game is in standby (e.g., from the end of payout to the time of the next game start operation), or during the game (e.g., from the start operation to the end of payout), or both. Also, since players may change during the standby period, the display of (A) may be given priority over the display of (B) while the game is in standby ((B) is not displayed), and the display of (B) may be given priority over the display of (A) while the game is in progress ((A) is not displayed). Or the opposite may also be true. Alternatively, during either period, both (A) and (B) may be switched and displayed as described above.

In addition, for example, the display of (a) and (b) may be switched based on the player's switching operation rather than the passage of time. In this case, if the display unit is controlled by the main side, the display may be switched based on an operation on any operating means that does not affect the progress of the game, such as a bet operation during play (for example, pressing the MAX BET button 6a).

Also, if the display unit is controlled by the sub side, the display may be switched based on, for example, an operation on an operation unit for effects (e.g., an effect button). However, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have an operation unit for effects, the display may be switched based on an operation on an operation means that can be detected on the main side (e.g., a bet operation during play, a start operation while the reels are spinning, or a stop operation after the reels have stopped; an operation that does not affect the progress of the game) (when the corresponding information is received on the sub side).

Note that the operations that can switch the display are not limited to operations that do not affect the progress of the game. The display may also be switched based on an operation that affects the progress of the game (for example, a bet operation when no bet has been placed, a start operation before the reels spin, or a stop operation before the reels stop). In other words, the display may be switched by an operation that does not affect the progress of the game, allowing the player to switch the display at any time, or the display may be switched by an operation that affects the progress of the game, allowing the player to switch the display without requiring a separate operation. Either method has the effect of increasing convenience.

As another notification mode, for example, the advance notification in (a) may be given by the display unit, while the advance notification in (b) may be given by, for example, emitting a sound from a speaker, such as "500 more sheets until the limiter activates" or "Only a few more sheets until the limiter activates." Or the reverse may be possible. Alternatively, as described above, the advance notification that is given priority may be given by the display unit, and the advance notification that is not given priority may be given by the speaker. Also, when giving an advance notification by a speaker, it is possible to use a lamp instead of or in addition to the speaker. This has the effect of providing more information even with only one display unit that can be used for the advance notification. This also applies when the content of the advance notification is switchable.

Note that different identifiers may be displayed for the advance notification (a) and the advance notification (b). This has the effect of making it easy to see which advance notification is being issued. For example, in the advance notification (a), if there are 500 coins remaining until the special limit state is activated, "L500" is displayed. On the other hand, in the advance notification (b), if there are 500 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated, "H500" is displayed. In other words, the "L" or "H" displayed in the first digit of the 7-segment LED becomes an identifier, and it is possible to recognize that these are different advance notifications even when the same number of coins remaining is displayed. Note that these identifiers are merely examples. For example, any letters, numbers, symbols, dot patterns, etc. can be used as identifiers as long as they can be displayed on a 7-segment LED and the display form makes it possible to recognize that different advance notifications are being issued. Note that the identifiers may be any letters, numbers, symbols, dot patterns, etc. that can be displayed on a 7-segment LED and that make it possible to recognize that different advance notifications are being issued from the display form.

If there is sufficient space, an identifier consisting of two or more digits can be used. For example, identifiers such as "LM" or "SHL" may be used. When using a single-digit identifier, it is preferable not to use identifiers such as "E" which can easily be mistaken for an error notification, "S" which cannot be distinguished from a number in the segment display (which is the same as "5" in the segment display), or "O" (which is the same as "0" in the segment).

Also, the advance warning of (a) and the advance warning of (b) may be displayed in different display modes (here, for example, colors). This has the effect of making it easy to see which advance warning is being given. For example, if the segment display can be displayed in multiple colors, the advance warning of (a) may be displayed in red, and the advance warning of (b) may be displayed in blue. Note that the above-mentioned method of making the identifiers different and the method of making the display modes different may be combined, or only one of the methods may be used. It is also possible to make the display modes different, for example, by having one light on and the other flash (or have different patterns).

When the advance notification (a) and the advance notification (b) can be displayed with different identifiers or display formats (including cases where only one of the advance notifications is given and the identifier or display format is specific), the configuration may be such that the player can confirm how to read the display regarding the advance notification. For example, in the case of the advance notification (a), an explanation such as "'L000' means the number of coins remaining until the special limit function" may be displayed at any position on the surface of the front door (e.g., the base or part of the waist panel 13). This has the effect of making the content of the advance notification easier to understand.

A gaming machine that can provide any of the advance warnings described above has the effect of reducing the occurrence of unforeseen losses due to a sudden halt in play, for example, when play has begun.

(Regarding volume adjustment)
As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker group can be adjusted at least by the player operating the user menu, but in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which the game arcade can also adjust the volume. For example, a "volume setting" can be selected in the hall menu, which is the game arcade's menu screen, and the volume level can be selected here. At least one of the selectable volume levels is set to a volume level that does not exceed a predetermined volume value (e.g., 85 db) even if the player sets the maximum volume by operating the user menu.

In this way, even if a player who likes loud sounds plays at maximum volume, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes into consideration not only the gaming environment of nearby players, but also the living environment of gaming establishment staff and local residents. Note that the manner in which the gaming establishment can set the volume level is not limited to this. For example, a physical switch such as a slide switch or volume switch may be provided inside or on the back of the cabinet, and the desired volume level may be selected by operating the switch.

1,401... Pachislot machine, 71,411... Main control board, 72,412... Sub-control board, 100... Main control circuit, 101,501... Main CPU, 200... Sub-control circuit, 201... Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a main control board on which a main control unit that controls the progress of a game and a gaming value control unit that controls management of a gaming value are mounted,
the main control board is mounted inside the game machine in a state where it is accommodated in a transparent board case, and a unique information display unit for displaying unique information is provided at a position where it can be seen in that state;
The main control board has a board body having a conductive wiring pattern disposed on a surface thereof , and an insulating layer covering the surface of the board body;
The insulating layer is configured to be transparent or semi-transparent;
the unique information is disposed between the substrate body and the insulating layer in the unique information display portion,
the main control board has a surface on which the unique information display unit is provided as a component mounting surface, and a plurality of electronic components can be mounted on the component mounting surface;
In the component mounting surface other than the unique information display portion, component information for identifying the mounted electronic component is printed on a surface of the insulating layer,
A plurality of surface mount components and a plurality of dip mount components are mounted on the main control board,
terminals of the plurality of surface mount components are soldered to the component mounting surface;
terminals of the plurality of DIP-mounted components are inserted into through holes penetrating the main control board from the component mounting surface side and soldered to a back side of the component mounting surface;
The plurality of surface mount components include at least a first integrated circuit connected to the microprocessor of the main control unit and a second integrated circuit connected to the microprocessor of the gaming value control unit;
the first integrated circuit and the second integrated circuit each have a plurality of terminals, and the plurality of terminals of the first integrated circuit and the plurality of terminals of the second integrated circuit are connected by a plurality of wirings,
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of test points are provided and connected to each of the plurality of wirings.

Images